,yC-NRLF 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2007 with funding from 
 
 IVIicrosoft Corporation 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/companytrainingiOOstacrich 
 
COMPANY TRAINING 
 
 {Infantry) 
 
 By 
 
 CAPTAIN CROMWELL STACEY 
 
 U. S. Infantry 
 Inspector^Instructor 
 
 Franklin Hudson Publishing Co. 
 kansas city, mo. 
 
Ufi^. 
 
 Copyrighted 1916 by 
 Franklin Hudson Publishing Co. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Administration, Company 7 
 
 Arms, Care of Arms and Equipment 12, 105-108 
 
 Attack, The 140 
 
 Battle, Training for 163 
 
 Bayonet Training 70-95 
 
 Books, Reference 14 
 
 Boxes, Regulation Marking, etc 36, 37, 38 
 
 Camps 112 
 
 Cooks and Kitchens 114, 161 
 
 Combat Patrols 137, 139, 144, 152 
 
 Drill, Company 61-69 
 
 Drill, Recruit 48-54 
 
 Drill, Squad 54-60 
 
 Drill Schedules 45-46, 94 
 
 Deployment 64, 148, loO, 164 
 
 Defense, The; Intrenchments, etc 147, 152-157 
 
 Equipment A, B, and C 19 
 
 Equipment, Field Kit, etc ; 16 
 
 Enlisted Strength Required 18 
 
 Feet and Shoes 38, 113 
 
 Field Ranges, Packing, etc 26, 27, 29, 36 
 
 Organization, Company 18-21 
 
 Property, Care of; Boards of Survey, etc 96, 101 
 
 Lectures. 
 
 Camps 112 
 
 Outposts and Camp Guards 117 
 
 Marches and Advance Guards 121 
 
 Reconnaissance and Patrolling : 128 
 
 Contact and Deployment for Action 137 
 
 The Attack 140 
 
 The Defense 147 
 
 Intrenching and Intrenchments 152 
 
 Defense of Houses and Localities 158 
 
 Training for Battle ^ 163 
 
 Instruction Cards 5, 120, 135 
 
 Plate s-howing Field Belt, Equipment, etc 42 
 
 355536 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The man who comes forward in time of war to serve his comitry 
 shows that he is courageous, patriotic, and sincere. 
 
 But the man who studies, drills, and prepares himself in time 
 of peace so that he can serve his country in time of war shows that 
 he possesses the above quahties and more; it shows that his patriot- 
 ipm is practical and sincere; it shows that his bravery is real, and 
 not mere hysteria or transient enthusiasm; it shows that he has red 
 blood in his veins, and is wiUing to make sacrifices for an ideal. 
 Of such stuff true soldiers are made. 
 
 It frequently takes more courage to train for war in time of 
 peace than it does to enlist when the whole country is ablaze with 
 martial hysteria. 
 
 May the people of the United States accord to the men who 
 serve in the National Guard the support which they have a right to 
 expect and in fact demand for the self-sacrificing devotSon which 
 prompts them to give up their time and money that they may be 
 able to serve their country usefully when it needs them. To these 
 men this Uttle book is dedicated. 
 
 Cromwell Stagey, 
 Captain U.S. Infantry, Inspedor-Instmctor. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 In my aasociation with the oflBcera of the National Guard of 
 several States, extending over a period of about eight years, it has 
 been my good fortune to have made many warm friends among 
 them. I have assisted them whenever possible, and, as a reward, 
 have secured their confidence. I know the trials and tribulations 
 of the National Guard captains as well as if I had been one myself, 
 and in consequence fully appreciate the terrible handicaps and dis- 
 advantages under which they strive to train their companies so that 
 they may be able to take their place on the firing-line when the 
 awful test of war shall come with credit to themselves, their com- 
 panies, and the Nation. 
 
 I fully appreciate the self-sacrificing patriotic devotion which 
 inspires these men in their work—generally without help or appre- 
 ciation from the people they strive to serve, at great personal and 
 financial sacrifices, which are not dreamed of or appreciated by the 
 people among whom they live and work. 
 
 It is at the request of these fi lends of mine in the Guard that 
 this little book has been written, with the hope that it may further 
 assist them in their great work, and also with the hope that it may 
 prove of help and benefit to other friends and comrades in the Guard 
 whom as yet I have not had the pleasure to meet. 
 
 I claim nothing new. The training and handling of mihtary 
 men is a science as old as the world itself, and I believe that training 
 will be necessary so long as human nature remains as it is to-day , 
 and I see no immediate prospect of change. 
 
 In my military career of twenty-four years I have received un- 
 limited help from older and more experienced officers, and in writing 
 this little book I am doing only what all good soldiers have done 
 from time immemorial — that is, to help their younger brothers. 
 
 In conclusion, I wish to add one word more. 1 have foimd the 
 methods outlined herein good in training regulars and National 
 Guardsmen. Many wiU not heed this Uttle book, and in regard to 
 the others, I hope it will help them to prepare our country for war, 
 which will surely come. May we be ready. 
 
 Cromwell Stacey, 
 Captain U. S. Infantry, Inspector-Instructor. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 RULES OF THE GAME. 
 
 For Enlisted Men of the National Guard. 
 
 1. The fiist duty of a soldier if- loyai, unhesitating obedience. 
 Without this quality an army is no better than a mob. The value 
 of an organization Uea in the fact that a thousand men submit their 
 wills to one man and are moved as one man. One hundred dis- 
 ciphned men are always superior to a thousand undisciplined men . 
 
 2. Respect your officers. Your Hves are in their hands in 
 action and they know more of tjie game than you do. They fre- 
 quently know what cards the other fellow has, which you do not, so 
 you cannot tell what cards should be played. It may be necessary 
 that you be sacrificed in order that the fight may be won. Don't be 
 a quitter; play the game. Remember, in war you are only part of 
 a machine, one checker on the board. It may be necessary to lose 
 you in order to win the game. 
 
 3. Show respect to your officers at aU times. If you do not 
 respect them in time of peace, you will not obey them in time of war, 
 and that means death and disaster. War is not a lady-like game. 
 It is team-woik that counts. We want the team to win. 
 
 4. Never fail to salute your officers at all times and in all 
 places. Never fail to stand to attention when they speak to you 
 or you speak to them. Remember, that is part of the game. Play it 
 like a man, and not like a dub. Remember, strangers judge you by 
 these signs. Get the reputation of being a fine military organization, 
 and not that of a uniformed mob. 
 
 5. Wheu in ranks, stand still; keep your head and eyes straight 
 to the front; don't fix your hat or raise your hands. Those things 
 are the earmarks of a recruit, and trained soldiers notice them 
 instantly. It is part of the game. Play it right. 
 
 6. Get the habit of watching your officers and non-commis- 
 sioned officers for orders. A mistake or misunderstanding of orders 
 in action means defeat and ruin. If you don't develop these quali- 
 ties in time of peace, you won't do it on the battle-field. Remember, 
 an untrained man on the battle-field stands about as much chance 
 
6 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 as a dub in a poker-game. You can't bluff it through with old 
 hands; it will come to a show-down. 
 
 7. Remember, you sat in on this game of your own free will 
 and accord. Play it right. Don't be a quitter. Put the same 
 spirit into unpleasant duties that you will into pleasant ones. War 
 is not a pleasant game or one for ladies. It takes strong men to 
 play it right. Most of your duties are not always pleasant, but they 
 are necessary just the same. A nation that has difficulty in getting 
 strong men for soldiers is a decadent one and does not deserve liberty 
 or self-government. 
 
 8. Remember, the defense of your State and Nation is in your 
 hands; it is the work of strong men with red blood in their veins. 
 Be careful to do everything to raise the reputation of your organiza- 
 tion, and nothing that will injure it. It k an honor to wear the 
 uniform of a soldier of the United States. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 COMPANY ADMINISTRATION. 
 
 Moat National Guard companies have great difficulty in keeping 
 their records up to date; this is usually due to two causes: one, lack 
 of system, and the other, carelessness. Most officers and men have 
 the time if they go at the work systematically. 
 
 The first thing that you must do is to organize your company 
 office properly; in order to do this you must have an orderly-room, 
 as the captain's office in the regular service is called; this must be a 
 room to which enlisted men have access only when they are sent for 
 or wish to see the captain or first sergeant on business. The fre- 
 quent practice of having the orderly-roc- m in the company-room 
 (enlisted men's room) or in the store-room is bad. The captain and 
 the clerks cannot keep their records properly or do their work 
 without annoyance or interference from the men of the company. 
 Work under these conditions is impossible. 
 
 Having seemed a room where you can work in peace and quiet, 
 the next thing to do is to secure places, at which the office force can 
 work. Expensive desks are not ne)3es3ary. A good solid pine table 
 with plain pine pigeon-holes, blotters, inkstands, pens, and paper 
 is all that is necessary. There should also be boxes in which the 
 company retained papers can be systematically kept. There should 
 be a table for the captain, one for each of his lieutenant»s, one for the 
 first sergeant, and one for the company clerk. Each should have 
 its set of pigeon-holes properly marked to show the purpose for which 
 used; these pigeon-holes should be marked as follows: Finished 
 Business, Unfinished Business, Miscellaneous, From the Adjutant 
 General, To the Adjutant General, To Be Filed, etc. After you get 
 your office organized, many other headings will suggest themselves 
 to you. The captain should have at least twelve pigeon-holes to 
 his desk, and the first sergeant and company clerk an equal number; 
 the lieutenants should have at least six, and ten would be better. 
 No man can do his work properly or take interest in his work un- 
 less he has a nice, clean, orderly place in which to work. 
 
8 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 It is essential that lieutenants have a place to do their clerical 
 work. The average lieutenant in the Guard seems to think that 
 he has done his whole duty when he is present at drill. It never 
 occurs to him, and rarely to his captain, that he should take an act- 
 ive interest in the workings of the company and be familiar with all 
 the correspondence and interior workings of the company. Keep 
 your lieutenants in touch with all the work, so that if you are 
 absent or sick, they will be able to take charge immediately and 
 cany on the work or answer any correspondence that comes in. An 
 efficient company of infantry should be so organized that any man, 
 from the captain down to the cook, can drop out and not dif organize 
 the outfit. If your company is not run in this manner, it is not 
 efficient. Make your lieutenants work. Give them important 
 things to do, and see that they do them. Make your first seigeant 
 and your company clerk do their proper share of keeping the records. 
 Have it clearly understood just what each officer and man is to do, 
 and see that they do them. Remember, the captain\<< ]ob is to su- 
 pervise the entire company, and not to devote his entire time to any 
 one class of work. I can hear you say, "But they don't know the 
 work." Good. Will they ever learn unless you teach them and 
 require them to do it? You must teach them; it is part of your job, 
 and will well repay you in the end. 
 
 The Ueutenants, first sergeant, and company clerk should be 
 required to be at the armory an hour before drill; this will give them 
 ample time in which to clear up all paper work and keep things 
 in shape. 
 
 "Now, how will I use my Ueutenants?" I hear you say. Let 
 us see. A letter comes from the adjutant general wanting to know 
 the condition of your tentage. Turn it over to the first heutenant; 
 tell him what you want him to do and when you want a report from 
 him. Make a note on your memorandum calendar (every captain 
 and firat sergeant should have one on his desk), and when the day 
 for the report arrives and you turn the leaf it will automatically 
 remind you of the fact. Ask the lieutenant for his report. Require 
 the second Heutenant to assist you in the same manner. 
 
 Taking care of the company and its records is a big job for one 
 man, but five men can do it easily if each man does his share. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 9 
 
 You, of course, must have files for orders, letters, reports, etc., 
 and they must be kept up to date. 
 
 Pay particular attention to your descriptive lists, muster- and 
 pay-rolls, and see that men are discharged promptly when their 
 discharge is due. I have known men who belonged to the Guard 
 who did not receive a discharge for seven or eight months after their 
 time had expired; some never received a discharge at all. You 
 can't have discipline under these conditions. If you are not careful 
 about enUstment papers and discharges, your men will not take 
 their service in the Guard seriously, and any kind of discipline 
 whatever will be impossible. You must be on the job every minute 
 yourself, and if you are, others will be also; if you are not, others 
 will soon find it out and they will slack up, and your company will 
 soon be ruined. 
 
 In keeping the records of individual men, I have found that the 
 very best system is to have a linen envelope, in which is placed every 
 order or record that in any way pertains to the man. When you 
 want to find out something about Brown, all you have to do is to 
 get his envelope and his entire military record should be there- 
 target reports, dehnquency court records, enUstment paper, special 
 orders that relate to him, etc. I have used this system for many 
 years and it is entirely satisfactory in every respect. 
 Discipline. 
 
 I have heard many National Guard officers say: "Thi^ is not 
 the Regular Army and we can't have the same discipline." True, 
 but you can try. The nearer you approach to the Regular Army 
 standard the better organization you will have and the more eflicient 
 your company will be. It is possible to have excellent discipline 
 in the National Guard— keep that always in mind. If you beUeve 
 that discipline is not possible, you will never have it; you are half 
 defeated already. If you do not believe it is possible, you will not 
 strive for it and will in consequence never attain it. Now, how will 
 you attain discipUne? You will achieve it by insisting on all those 
 little courtesies that are prescribed in regulations (saluting, etc.), 
 and by insisting on orders being obeyed promptly, and by requiring 
 smartness and precision in close-order drill. 
 
 Your men must be present for drill promptly in proper uniform; 
 
10 , COMPANY TRAINING (iNFANTRT). 
 
 they muat obey all company ordera and regulations, and must keep 
 their lockers and equipments clean and neat. You must insist upon 
 these apparently small things continually. This is the way you get 
 order, organization, and discipline. 
 
 Your men must always be respectful to you and to all other 
 officers. They must salute you, stand to attention in your presence, 
 and never enter the orderly-room without knocking and first re- 
 ceiving the word to come in. These things will be continually 
 sUghted — ^usually from ignorance or carelessness — and you must 
 continually insist upon their observance. Now, I don't mean that 
 you must nag the men, but you must call a man's attention to these 
 things and require that he observe them; do this kindly and firmly, 
 and avoid patronizing the men, as this irritates them more than 
 anything else. And, whatever you do, don't explain and be apolo- 
 getic; they will lose respect for you if you do; simply say that the 
 regulations prescribe it, it is a part of the game, and that you will 
 require it. 
 
 After a man receives an order, see that he salute^ and makes a 
 correct about face when he leaves you. 
 
 When an enUsted man speaks to you, require him to stand 
 about four feet from you. It is also customarj^ for enlisted men to 
 get the first sergeant's permission before they speak to the captain, 
 except, of course, at drill or other emergency. 
 
 Military discipline is logical, intelHgent control; good discipline 
 is never despotic, unreasonable, or arbitrary. Don't try to enforce 
 discipline in your company by bluff; it won't work. Be careful to 
 explain to your men clearly what you want, and then see that they 
 do it. 
 
 Very few men deliberately disobey an order. Mistakes that 
 are made are usually the result of poorly-given orders. One of the 
 hardest things in this world to do is to give an order that cannot be 
 misunderstood or is fool-proof. 
 
 Never coddle your men or patronize them. 
 
 Be on good terms with your men, but never get familiar with 
 them or permit any familiarity on their part. You can always stop 
 famiharity by a brief answer or by a dignified manner, and this 
 without getting the reputation of being a snob or stuck up. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 11 
 
 Be very particular about your personal appearance, and always 
 have your uniform neat and clean and wear it in a military manner. 
 Keep your shoes and leggings poHshed. Men Uke to take pride in 
 their officers, and your appearance helps discipline more than you 
 realize. 
 
 Never neglect to return the salutes of enlisted men in a military 
 manner, and require your lieutenants to do the same thing. Nothing 
 will undermine discipline quicker or more surely than to have 
 officers over men who return salutes in a slouchy or indifferent 
 manner or more frequently do not return the salute at all. In a 
 very short time men will cease to salute such officers. 
 
 Never fail to see that they use the word ''sir" when speaking 
 to you, and see that they stand to attention in your presence. 
 These things are very necessary for discipline. 
 
 I do not beheve that it is necessary or desirable to insist upon 
 the salute when outside of the armory unless you are both in uniform, 
 but when you enter the armory door, whether in civiUan clothing 
 or not, you are soldiers, and military courtesy must be observed. 
 
 Insist upon steadiness in ranks; make the men keep their hands 
 down and stand still. You can't have discipline without enforcing 
 these small but very important things. If a man raises his hands 
 in ranks, call him by name and correct him briefly; don't bluster 
 or bawl him out; this method will bring about the desired result 
 about as quickly as anything that I know of. 
 
 Take care of every small thing that comes up; let the men * 
 know that it has been noticed, and you will never have any big 
 things to handle. 
 
 Good discipHne is the result of moral control, and not brute 
 force. , 
 
 Uniform. 
 
 Insist upon your men being in proper uniform, with their hats 
 straight on their heads, blouses buttoned, collars hooked; or, if in 
 shirts, require them to have the sleeves turned down and buttoned 
 at the ^^Tists, and see that every button is in place and used for the 
 purpose for which designed. 
 
 Many Guardsmen believe that the tougher they look the more 
 they look like soldiers; this is not true, and should not be tolerated 
 
12 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 for a moment. The well-trained soldier is always neat, clean, and 
 is a self-respecting gentleman; the man who conducts himself in 
 any other manner shows exactly what he is — a recruit, without dis- 
 cipHne, training, or pride. 
 
 Arms. 
 
 The well-trained soldier looks upon his rifle as his best friend 
 and always takes the best care of it at all times. I have always be- 
 lieved that each man should be required to clean and care for his 
 own rifle. The practice of having the armorer clean rifles is perni- 
 cious and tends to reUeve the individual soldier of responsibility. 
 It may be difficult to enforce this at first, but insist upon it, and in 
 time you will attain this very desirable result. I have handled 
 many rifles that were so dirty and badly looked after that it was 
 necessary to wash your hands afterwards; this is absolutely wrong. 
 
 Belts should be scrubbed with H. & H. soap or other soap 
 issued for the purpose, and kept clean and free from dirt and grease. 
 
 Gun-slings should be treated in a similar manner. The average 
 gun-sling is filthy. 
 
 Scrub your bayonet scabbards also. 
 
 But don't use any soap except that issued for the purpose. 
 
 Shelter tent halves should never be scrubbed with soap; it in- 
 jures the fiber and will cause them to leak. If muddy or soiled, 
 rinse them off with clean cold water. 
 
 Rifles should be kept locked in the racks while not in use, and 
 there should always be a responsible non-commissioned officer 
 present when they are taken from the racks, to see that the men get 
 their own rifles. Watch this carefully. Nothing discourages a 
 man Uke having his rifle clean and in good shape and then to have 
 someone else take it out and use it for target practice or drill. If 
 this is permitted, the company commander is responsible and is 
 inefficient. 
 
 Non-commissioned Officers. 
 
 Don't expect to find them already trained. You must appoint 
 any suitable intelligent man and then train him in his duties; in order 
 to be able to do this you must know his work better than you expect 
 him to know it. Remember, the efficient company commander 
 knows every man's job in the company better than he knows it 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 13 
 
 himself. Don't fool with incompetents for a moment; this game 
 is too serious. Allow no personal like or feeling to influence you 
 in the appointment or reduction of non-commissioned officers; 
 there should be only one thing that should be considered — the 
 efficiency of the company as a whole. Let this be your guide, and 
 you will make few mistakes. 
 
 Enforcement of Discipline. 
 
 Company commanders may say : ' ' Those suggestions are good , 
 but how am I to enforce them?" This question will have to be 
 answered by every company commander himself. It will depend 
 upon the personality of the man, the standard of discipUne in his 
 company and in the Guard of the State to which the company be- 
 longs. No hard-and-fast rule can be laid down. I beHeve that the 
 best way, and one that admits of general apphcation, is to appeal 
 to the soldiers' pride and better nature. Show the man the ne- 
 cessity for the measures which you wish to enforce and impress 
 upon him the seriousness of the work in which he is engaged — I 
 mean that of preparing himself so that he can defend his country 
 in time of war. This appeal will usually go home and bring results. 
 If this method fails, you will have to use more drastic methods. 
 
 I know of a company commander who required men who were 
 late for drill to work in the store-room cleaning rifles or other nec- 
 essary but unpleasant work as a punishment for being late. He 
 would not allow these men to drill at all that evening. This method 
 is good. Try it. If, as a result of this, the man went absent from 
 the next drill, he preferred charges against him and tried him by 
 the delinquency court and had him fined. As a general principle, 
 I don't beUeve in resorting to the dehnquency court unless all other 
 methods fail, and then I beHeve in working it to the limit. How- 
 ever, don't attempt it unless you have a good State law and can 
 make it stick. I can tell you from experience that it will not hurt 
 your company in any way and will have no effect whatever on en- 
 listments of the kind you want. If it scares off the others, so 
 much the better. I have seen it tried out thoroughly and compre- 
 hensively and it has always produced good results — provided, of 
 course, that you have a good State law; if your State law is not 
 good, don't attempt it, as it will do more harm than good. 
 
14 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 General Remarks. 
 
 Moat men make mistakes through lack of proper training and 
 clear instruction; if this is the case, it is your fault or the fault of 
 your predecessor. Correct it. A very good method of imparting 
 instruction and making men famiUar with orders and regulations is 
 to have what you want them to know printed on little cards that 
 can be carried in the pocket. Men will read these cards during 
 leisure moments and will thus absorb much valuable information. 
 
 In this book in connection with the lectures you will find cards 
 which contain a sentinel's outpost orders and instructions for pa- 
 trols. Have similar cards printed and issue one to every man in 
 the company. 
 
 The card on "Rules of the Game" ia especially recommended, 
 as it produced most excellent results. 
 
 You can in this manner place any subject before your men 
 and feel assured that they will absorb it. Make your cards brief 
 and very clear, and you will always attain the desired object. 
 
 The lectures can be taken up in non-commissioned officers' 
 school, read and discussed, and excellent results wrU follow. You 
 should have a blackboard with colored chalks to illustrate them; 
 this board is also useful to draw diagrams of movements in drill 
 that are not clearly understood. 
 
 It is beUeved that the orders bound as an appendix to the 
 second chapter will be found very useful. Many officers are not 
 only not famihar with these orders, but are ignorant of the existence 
 of the orders themselves. 
 
 Reference Books. 
 
 Every company should have a mihtary library belonging to the 
 orderly-room. These books should never be removed from the 
 office, but all men in the company should be permitted to refer to 
 them whenever they desire. 
 
 It is also excellent for the company to have a library for the 
 exclusive use of the men belonging to it; this Ubrary should have a 
 distinct mihtary tone to produce the best results. Fill it with 
 mihtary stories, histories of campaigns, and standard works of 
 fiction deahng with adventure or mihtary subjects. Every man 
 has a certain amount of the mihtary spirit in his make-up, and what 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 15 
 
 you want to do is to cultivate and foster it. Trashy novels and 
 stories dealing with kind-faced cows standing in silvery streams 
 should be prohibited; they are not proper reading for men whom you 
 are trying to make, soldiers of. If men want this kind of reading, 
 they can get it outside of the company. 
 
 Hang your walls with good military pictures; they also help 
 lots to cultivate the miUtary spirit. In order to produce the best 
 results, you must surround your men with a miUtary atmosphere. 
 
 The following books should be in the orderly-room library: 
 
 *'U. S. Army Regulations.'' 
 
 ''The Organized Militia Regulations of the War Department." 
 
 ''Field Service Regulations, U. S. Army." 
 
 "Manual of Court^Martial, U. S. Army." 
 
 "U. S. Infantry Drill Regulations and Manual of the Bayonet." 
 1911. 
 
 "Manual of Interior Guard Duty." 1914. 
 
 "Small Arms Firing Manual, U. S. Aimy." 1914. 
 
 "Manual of Mihtary Field Engineering." (Beach.) 
 
 "Troops on Riot Duty." (Stockton-Dickinson.) 
 
 "Drill Regulations and Service Manual for Sanitary Troops, 
 U. S. Army." (For teaching first aid.) 
 
 "Instructions and Problems in Guard Duty for the Private 
 Soldier." Government publication. 
 
 "Elements of Mihtary Sketching." (Barnes.) Published by 
 U. S. Infantry Association. * 
 
 "Infantry Equipment Manual, Organized Mihtia." 
 
 "Description and Rules for the Management of the U. S. 
 Magazine Rifle." No. 1923. 
 
 "Description of the Automatic Pistol, Cahber .45, Model 1911." 
 No. 1134. 
 
 "Description of the Infantry Equipment, Model 1910." (If 
 you have the new equipment.) 
 
 "Manual for Non-commissioned Officers and Privates of In- 
 fantry of the Organized Militia and Volunteers of the United 
 States." 1914. 
 
 "Aids to Scouting." (Baden-Powell.) 
 
 "Manual for Army Cooks, U. S. Army." 
 
16 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 '* Training Infantry." (Morrison.) A moat excellent book. 
 
 *' Military Policy of the United States." (Upton.) War De- 
 partment publication. 
 
 ''The Valor of Ignorance." (Homer Lea.) 
 
 "Fire Problems." (Pilcher.) An EngHsh book, but most 
 excellent. 
 
 I do not think that you can safely omit a single book in the 
 above Hst. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 General Orders, \ WAR DEPARTMENT, 
 
 No. 3. / Washington, January 12, 1915. 
 
 I. The bacon chest and condiment chest are discontinued 
 as part of the field equipment. Those now in the hands of troops 
 or supply officers will form part of the permanent camp equipment 
 until the supply on hand is exhausted. (2234786, A. G. O.) 
 
 II. So much of Paragraph II., General Orders, No. 23, War 
 Department, 1906, as relates to the clothing component of the filed 
 kit and the surplus kit, as amended, is further amended as follows: 
 
 1. The field kit, clothing component, for all arms and branches 
 of the service, momited and dismounted, in addition to the clothing 
 worn on the person, is composed of the following articles: 
 
 1 blanket. 2 stockings, pairs. 
 
 1 comb. 1 toothbrush. 
 
 1 drawers, pair. 1 towel. 
 
 1 poncho (dismounted men). 1 undershirt. 
 
 1 sUcker (mounted men).* 1 housewife (for 1 man of each 
 
 1 soap, cake. squad). 
 
 The foregoing field kit, which is carried on the person by dis- 
 mounted men and on the packed saddle by mounted men, is supple- 
 mented by the surplus kit, the two together making up the clothing 
 component of the service kit. 
 
 2. The surplus kit consists of: 
 
 1 breeches, pair. 2 stockings, pairs. 
 
 1 drawers, pair. 1 shoe-laces, extra pair. 
 
 1 shirt, oUve drab. 1 imdershirt. 
 
 1 shoes, russet leather, pair. 
 
 The surplus kit pertains to Equipment ''B" (Paragraph I., 
 G. O., No. 85, W. D., 1914), as part of the permanent camp equip- 
 
 *For all enlisted men of the Quartermaster Corps, both mounted 
 and dismounted; also for enlisted men of the Hospital Corps de- 
 tailed as ambulance drivers and ambulance orderlies. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 
 
 17 
 
 ment, to be forwarded to troops when gerving in inatruction, ma- 
 neuver, mobilization, or concentration camps, or when in active 
 service a temporary suspension of operations permits the troops to 
 refit. In peace-time maneuvers and marches the surplus kit may 
 accompany the troops, if so directed in the orders prescribing the 
 movement. The vehicles and animals of the combat train and 
 those representing the divisional supply train will be utiHzed to 
 transport them. 
 
 3. The sweater will form part of Equipment "A" (Paragraph 
 I., G. O., No. 85, W. D., 1914), pertaining to field service, and, 
 when climatic conditions require its use, will be carried by the 
 soldier on his person. When sweaters are not prescribed to be 
 worn on the person, they will be collected into bundles of convenient 
 size and secured by burlap or other suitable material, or will be 
 boxed. They will be marked ready for shipment, to be forwarded 
 when required. In peace-time maneuvers and marches the sweater, 
 even though not prescribed to be carried by the soldier on the march, 
 may accompany the troops, if so directed in the orders prescribing 
 the movements. The vehicles and animals of the combat train and 
 those representing the divisional supply train will be utiUzed to 
 transport them. 
 
 The same rule will apply in regard to overcoats. 
 
 Surplus Kit Bag. 
 
 4. Surplu. kit bags will be issued to each organization at the 
 rate of one to each squad, one for the sergeants, and one for the cooks 
 
18 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 and musiciang (or trumpetera), and one for eveiy eight men of 
 detachments. 
 
 Each bag will be marked with the letter of the company and 
 the number of the regiment, aa provided in Paragraph 295, Army 
 Regulations, for haversacks, and the proper designation of the 
 squads to which the bags belong, both markings to be in center of 
 front cover flap, as shown in the illustration. 
 
 5. The kit bag for the sergeants and that for the cooks and 
 musicians (or trumpeters) will be marked ''Sergeg-nts," ''Cooks and 
 Musicians" (or Trumpeters), respectively. Similarly, the kit bags 
 for detachments will be appropriately marked. 
 
 The kit of each man will be packed as follows: 
 
 Stockings to be rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe; 
 shoes placed together, heels at opposite ends, soles outward, wrapped 
 tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied around the middle 
 by the extra pair of shoe-laces, each bundle to be tagged with the 
 company number of the owner. These individual kits will be 
 packed in the surplus kit bag in two layers of four kits each, the 
 breeches and olive drab sliirts to be neatly folded and packed on the 
 top and sides of the layers, the jointed cleaning-rod and case, pro- 
 vided for each squad, being attached by the thongs on the inside of 
 the bag. (2234786, A. G. O.) 
 
 III. Paragraph V, General Orders, No. 16, War Department, 
 1914, relating to the withdrawal of the surplus kit bag from issue as 
 an article of equipment for organizations of mountain artillery, ia 
 rescinded. (2234786A, A. G. O.) 
 
 By order of the Secretary of War: 
 
 A. L. Mills, 
 Brigadier General, General Staff Corps, 
 Oflficial: ' Acting Chief of Staff. 
 
 H. P. McCain, 
 
 The Adjutant Geneial. 
 
 General Orders, \ WAR DEPARTMENT, 
 
 No. 51. / Washington, July 2, 1914. 
 
 By direction of the President, the minimum enlisted strength 
 for each organization of the Organized Mihtia is fixed as follows* 
 
 For a company of infantry, total enlisted, 65. This is based 
 on apportionment to grades as follows, viz.: 1 first sergeant, 1 
 quartermaster sergeant, 4 sergeants , 6 corporals, 2 cooks, 1 artificer, 
 2 musicians, and 48 privates. 
 
 For a troop of cavalry, total enUsted, 65. This is based on ap- 
 portionment to grades as follows, viz. : 1 first sergeant, 1 quarter- 
 master sergeant, 6 sergeants, 6 corporals, 2 cooks, 1 farrier, 1 horse- 
 ^hoer, 1 saddler, 1 waggoner, 2 trumpeters, and 43 privates. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 19 
 
 For a company of engineerg, total enlisted, 65. This ia based 
 on apportionment to grades as follows, viz.: 1 first sergeant, 1 
 quartermaster sergeant, 5 sergeants, 8 corporals, 2 cooks, 2 musi- 
 cians, 23 first-class privates, and 23 second-class privates. 
 
 For a company of coast artillery, total enlisted, 65. This is 
 based on apportionment to grades as follows, viz. : 1 first sergeant, 
 1 quartermaster sergeant, 4 sergeants, 6 corporals, 2 cooks, 2 
 mechanics, 2 musicians, and 47 privates. 
 
 For a battery of field artillery, total enlisted, 133. This is 
 based on apportionment to grades as follows, viz. : 1 first sergeant, 
 1 quartermaster sergeant, 1 stable sergeant, 6 sergeants, 12 cor- 
 porals, 3 cooks, 1 chief mechanic, 4 mechanics, 2 musicians, and 
 102 privates. 
 
 For Signal Corps companies: 
 
 Type A company, total enlisted, 75. This is, based on appor- 
 tionment to grades as follows, viz. : 2 master signal electricians, 7 
 first-clast sergeants, 10 sergeants, 17 corporals, 2 cooks, 24 first-class 
 privates, and 13 privates. 
 
 Type B company, total e;ilisted, 74. This is based on appor- 
 tionment to grades as follow, viz.: 1 master signal electrician, 5 
 first-class sergeants, 8 sergeants, 13 corporals, 2 cooks, 34 first-class 
 privates, and 11 privates. 
 
 Type C company, total enlisted, 40. This is based on appor- 
 tionment to grades as follows, viz.: 1 master signal electrician, 3 
 first-class sergeants, 5 sergeants, 7 corporals, 2 cooks, 14 first-class 
 privates, and 8 privates. 
 
 Type D Company, total enlisted, 67. This is based on appor- 
 tionment to grades as foUows, viz. : 2 master signal electricians, 5 
 first-class sergeants, 8 sergeants, 13 corporals, 2 cooks, 29 first-class 
 privates, and 8 privates. 
 
 For the Hospital Corps: (a) Ambulance company section, 
 total enlisted, 43. This is based on apportionment to grades as 
 follows, viz, : 2 sergeants, first class, 7 sergeants, 1 acting cook, and 
 33 privates, first class, and privates, (b) Field hospital, total en- 
 listed, 33. This is based on apportionment to grades as follows, via. : 
 3 sergeants, first class, 6 sergeants, 2 acting cooks, and 22 privates, 
 first class, and privates. (1254402A, A. G, O.) 
 
 By order of the Secretary of War: 
 
 W. W. WOTHERSPOON, 
 
 Official: Major-General, Chief of Staff; 
 
 Geo. Andrews, 
 
 The Adjutant General. 
 
 General Orders, \ WAR DEPARTMENT, 
 
 No. 85. / Washington, November 20, 1914. 
 
 I. The following instructions pertaining to field equipment 
 are published for the information and guidance of all concerned: 
 
20 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 1. Field service is defined to be service in mobilization, con- 
 centration, instruction, or maneuver camps, as well as service in 
 campaign, in simulated campaign, or on the march. 
 
 The complete equipment for field service (equipment **C") 
 consists of engineer, ordnance, signal, medical, and quartermaster 
 property; and is divided into two classes, '*A" and ''B.^' 
 
 Equipment "A" is the equipment prescribed for use in cam- 
 paign, in simulated campaign, or on the march. It is limited to 
 the animals and vehicles prescribed in the Tables of Organization, 
 the equipment and clothing worn on the person, and the articles 
 carried on mount and transported in field, combat, and divisional 
 traine. 
 
 Equipment "B" is the equipment which, in addition to equip- 
 ment "A," is prescribed for the use of troops in mobiUzation, con- 
 centration, instruction, or maneuverx camps; and during such 
 pauses in operations against an enemy as permit the better care of 
 troops. 
 
 Equipment "C" is the sum of equipments "A'' and "B,'' and 
 therefore includes every article prescribed for field service as here- 
 inbefore defined. 
 
 When troops are ordered on field service, instructions will 
 state the letter designation of the equipment to be taken. The in- 
 structions will also specify whether mosquito-bars and head-nets are 
 to form a part of the equipment, and what winter articles, if any, 
 are to be included. The same rule will apply in the issuance of sub- 
 sequent orders when necessary. Articles distinctively for winter 
 use can be transported &t baggage on the march only when trans- 
 portation in addition to that prescribed in equipment ''A" is pro- 
 vided for that purpose. In addition to the allowances prescribed 
 as the field equipments, service coats, cravats, fatigue clothing, and 
 other ai tides of uniform, extra bedding, and toilet articles may be 
 taken by ofl&cers and enlisted men with equipment "B," when au- 
 thorized in orders directing the movement of troops. 
 
 2. The articles of engineer, ordnance, and signal property 
 listed in the several Unit AccountabiHty Equipment Manuals be- 
 long to equipment * 'A." The articles of medical property belonging 
 to equipment "A" are shown in the Manual for the Medical De- 
 partment. The articles of quartermaster property belonging to 
 equipments *'A," "B,'' and ''C," respectively, will be shown in 
 tables soon to be pubhshed. (2227724, A. G. O.) 
 
 By order of the Secretary of War: 
 
 H. L. Scott, 
 Official: Brigadier General, Chief of Staff. 
 
 E. F. Ladd, 
 
 The Adjutant General. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 21 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 ORGANIZATION AND EQUIPMENT. 
 
 When an officer attains to the grade of company commander, 
 hig lesponsibiHties become great; this responsibility is shared only 
 with the colonel of a regiment; the responsibilities* of all other 
 officers sink into insignificance when compared with the load carried 
 by the captain and the colonel. Each is directly responsible for the 
 training of an organization. If they are efficient, their organizations 
 are efficient; if they are not, their organizations reflect their in- 
 competence. 
 
 The U. S. Infantry DriU Regulations say: "Only one kind of 
 infantry is required in war— good infantry.** 
 
 The first question which naturally arises in the mind of the 
 company commander is : "Is my company efficient? if not, in what 
 respect is it deficient?" Next, "How can I make it an efficient 
 organxziation? " 
 
 Let us start at the beginning, and let me ask you a few ques- 
 tions; if you can answer them satisfactorily to yourself, good; if 
 not, don't read any further until you have corrected these defects; 
 then proceed: 
 
 Is your company properly organized? Have you your proper 
 number of non-commissioned officers, cooks, artificer, and musicians? 
 If not, appoint them. 
 
 Is your company properly equipped? Have you your in- 
 trenching tools, signal kits, first-aid packets, proper number of 
 rifles, equipments, etc.? If not, get them. 
 
 Is your property all marked as required by Paragraph 295, 
 Army Regulations, 1913? If not, mark it. While the Regulations 
 do not require clothing to be marked, stiU I have found it advisable 
 to mark everything— hats, leggings, clothing, blankets, etc. Mark 
 the article with crossed rifles, company letter, and regimental num- 
 ber, and the man's company number also; this will prevent articles 
 from getting lost, especially in the National Guard. All articles of 
 clothing can be marked on the inside. Use stencil furnished. Have 
 you the stencils required? If not, get them. 
 
22 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Now we come to clothing. Do your men know who to wear the 
 uniform? Your firat thought is, *'0f courae. " But I aak you again, 
 Do they? Has anyone ever shown the recruit, or even your older 
 men, exactly how the uniform should be worn? The uaual way 
 ia to give a man a uniform and let him put it on in any way that 
 suits him. Do you doubt the necessity for this? Good. Inspect 
 your company the next time it falls in, and note the number of hats 
 without hat-cords, those with the ha1>-cord3 not sewed on; note the 
 number of men who have their leggings on wrong; note the blouses 
 with buttons off or unbuttoned, etc. You will find that you have 
 overlooked these little but very important details. Correct them. 
 
 Are the above points essentials? Yes, they most certainly are. 
 A man cannot become a good soldier unless he takes a pride in his 
 equipment and uniform; he will never do thia until he is sure that 
 he will always have the same equipment. Teach him to be neat, 
 and he will take a pride in his uniform and his profession. Let him 
 dress like a tramp, and he wiU soon be an undisciplined tramp, with 
 dirty equipment, slouchy uniform, and that soon means a rusty gun, 
 bad drill, and no discipUne. 
 
 Are the campaign hats all properly creased? If not, get them 
 in shape and teach your men to place them carefully in the lockers 
 so that they will not get jammed out of ahape. 
 
 Have your men a uniform way of arranging their clothing in 
 the lockers? If not, prescribe one and enforce it. 
 
 AU these smaU things make for disciphne. Every time a man 
 does something that you want him to do in the manner that you 
 want it done you have acquired a certain amount of discipline. 
 He will obey you just that much better at driU and on the firing-line 
 some day. As I said before, all these small (usually thought unim- 
 portant) details go to make your company well discipUned and 
 efficient; neglect them and you will never have a well-disciplined 
 organization. You must strive for discipline aU the time, and never 
 neglect the amaUeat thing that will in any way help. We utiHze 
 these small things in the regular service to bi-ing about the desired 
 result and they are more necessary in the Guard than in the regular 
 service, because you have control over your men for such a short 
 time at best and at intervals. Make the most of the time you have. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 23 
 
 For this reason I require all drill in the National Guard, whether 
 clos.e or extended order, to be at attention. Your extended-order 
 drill is not so long that it will work any hardship upon your men, 
 and it will improve your disciphne wonderfully. 
 
 Now, how about your tenta? Have you the correct number 
 and kinds? Are they in good condition? Have you extra ropes 
 and the proper number of tent-pins? If not, get them. 
 
 How about your field range? Is it clean? Are the utensils 
 clean and have you the required number? Do you know how to 
 pack the field range? If not, see appendix to this chapter. It is 
 necessary that the range be packed exactly as prescribed for the 
 following reasons: First, you will lose parts if it is not properly 
 packed in transit; and second, you will not be able to get all of the 
 cooking utensils inside of it unless it is properly packed. After the 
 range has been used in camp, it should be thoroughly cleaned and 
 then painted with stove enamel, asphalt varnish, or any preparation 
 to keep it from rusting; this will burn off in a short time when the 
 range is used again and wiU keep your range in excellent condition. 
 The cooking utensils should be scoured, dried, and then greased with 
 cosmoHne to keep them from rusting; they can be washed in lye 
 when required for use. 
 
 Now, how about your company records? Are they kept up to 
 date? Get after them if they are not. Do you try to do it all 
 yourself? If you do, don't; it is not your work. Make your lieu- 
 tenants help, and be saie to have the first sergeant and the company 
 clerk do their share. The captain's business is to supervise eveiy- 
 thing. You must see that the others do not slight tjieir work. 
 You may say: ^*I have no one who knows the work; it is easier to 
 do it myself than it is to try to teach someone else." I know that, 
 but the System is wrong. Teach them; it is part of j^our work, and 
 will more than repay you in the end. Remember, if the efficiency 
 of your company depends entirely upon you, your organization will 
 never be really efficient, and you will not have the time to devote 
 to other more important things that need your attention. 
 
 Now, how about your first Sergeant and quartermaster sergeant? 
 Do they do their work, or are they merely figure-heads? If they are, 
 something is wrong. Correct it at once. I once saw an adjutant 
 
24 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 general of a State issuing clothing — in fact, doing quartermaster 
 sergeant's work. Was that Guard efficient? It certainly was not. 
 At another time I saw a lieutenant colonel issuing out blanket-rolls 
 which had been unloaded from a wagon to enlisted men. This is 
 absurd. The sergeants did not know how to do it. Could they ever 
 learn under such a system? Remember, in order to be a thoroughly 
 eflScient officer, the captain must know every man's job in the com- 
 pany better than he does himself. If you don't know their work, 
 learn it. 
 
 Is the armory, or at least the company-room in the armory, kept 
 clean at all times, especially on drill nights? If not, have it cleaned 
 and keep it clean. How can a man take a pride in his organization 
 if he comes to an untidy, unkept room to change clothes for drill? 
 Will tliis man, trained under such sunoundings, keep his camp 
 clean and sanitary when he takes the field and his life and the lives 
 of his comrades are at stake? He will not, and we will have the 
 horrors of the camps of 1898 repeated. 
 
 Your responsibilities as a company commander are great. 
 Take them seriously. 
 
 Now, how about shoes? Do you know anything about the 
 fitting of shoes? You should; you are a captain of foot troops. I 
 know that your men cannot get the Government shoe in time of 
 peace; but you should know how to fit shoes to them when they are 
 issued to you as they will be in war. One is apt to think that every 
 man knows whether a shoe fits him or not; he does not. The av- 
 erage man habitually wears a shoe too short and too narrow for 
 him. If you take the number given you by this man when issuing 
 Government shoes to him, your company will not be properly shod, 
 and they will not be able to march when put to the test. 
 
 Get the book, "The Soldier's Foot and the Mihtary Shoe," by 
 Munson. You will find things in it about your feet that you never 
 dreamed of. This is an essential. Read carefully G. O. No. 26, 
 August 16, 1912, War Department. This will teach you how to 
 measure the feet of your men. Also read G. O. No. 30, 1913, which 
 amends the above order in regard to socks. Socks are almost as 
 important as shoes. 
 
 How about your company boxes for packing surplus articles? 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 25 
 
 Do they conform in size to the War Department requirements? 
 Read G. O. No. 10, February 18, 1914, War Department, for sizes 
 required. (These orders are found as an appendix to this chapter.) 
 
 How about your tents for camp? are they folded as prescribed 
 in the Infantry Drill Regulations? If not, fold them in the proper 
 manner and keep them in shape. It takes no longer to fold them 
 correctly than it does to throw them together, and it has the ad- 
 ditional advantage of having them ready for transportation, if 
 necessary. 
 
 Do your men know how to make up the blanket-roU (old 
 pattern) correctly? Teach them. (See appendix to first chapter.) 
 I believe that it is better to have your rolls made up at all times; 
 articles do not then get lost, and if you are ordered out in a hurry, 
 everything is ready. Have two pegs in the company-room for each 
 man; hang the made-up blanket-roll on one and the man^s belt, 
 haversack, canteen, etc., on the other; have the man's company 
 number stenciled above the pegs. Remember, each man in the com- 
 pany should be given a company number, and aU of his equipment 
 should be marked with this number; this will prevent articles from 
 getting lost or misplaced. The method of doing this is prescribed 
 in Paragraph 295 A. R., 1913. The man's locker in the armory 
 will bear the same number. This is system. 
 
 Now in regard to organization : Do you know where to find out 
 how your company should be organized? If not, get and study 
 ''Tables>f Organization, U. S. Army," 1914, and G. O. No. 51, W- 
 D., 1914. This is the one authoritative source for all information 
 of this kind. 
 
 Do you know what the proper equipment of every man in your 
 company is? If not, get the ''Infantry Equipment Manual, Or- 
 ganized Militia," 1914; this will teU you. 
 
 Do you know what the field kit and surplus kit are? Do you 
 know how and where they are carried, and when used? See appendix 
 to first chapter. 
 
 For convenience and reference, the orders referred to above 
 are bound as an appendix to this chapter. 
 
 "The Infantry Equipment Manual, Organized Militia," 1914, 
 
26 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 contains complete information in regard to the equipment of all kinds 
 and claggea that you should have on hand in your organization. 
 
 Always take a receipt for every article that goes out of your 
 store-room; this means, make every oflBcer and soldier receipt to 
 you for every article issued to him. Follow this rule, and you will 
 always know where your property is or should be; neglect it, and in 
 a short time you will have lost hundreds of dollars' worth of prop- 
 erty, which you will have to pay for. You will never be able to 
 make it up or find it. 
 
 Never throw away any article, no 'matter how worthless it 
 may seem, until it has been acted upon by a survey officer; he will 
 decide what disposition should be made of it. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Method of Packing Field Range No. 1 (Old Pattern). 
 
 Every article must be thoroughly cleaned and dried before 
 packing range. 
 
 Take down stovepipe and nest the pipes carefully. Pack rame 
 in fire-box. 
 
 Take off all stove -lids and pack same in the fire-box under 
 the grate. 
 
 Place stovepipe supporter in the top of the stove through small 
 door in font of stove. (This rod holds the stovepipe in the fire-box.) 
 
 Close small door and secure it. 
 
 Place fire shovel inside under grate. 
 
 Take one of the two bake-pans and place it on the ground. 
 Nest the boilers, and place them on their sides inside the bake-pan 
 with the bottom of the boilers toward the end of the bake-pan, 
 which will be at the back of the oven when the oven is closed. 
 
 Place stovepipe elbows inside nested boilers. 
 
 Place the meat-chopper, pot-cleaner, salt, pepper, and flour 
 dredges, sieve, dipper, ladles, butcher-knife, cleaver, meat saw, etc., 
 inside of the boilers. 
 
 Place the other bake pan inverted over the top of the boilers, 
 so that articles above enumerated are nested between both bake- 
 pans. 
 
 Place range lanterns between bake pans on the side toward the 
 door of the stove when the nested pans, etc., are packed in the oven. 
 
 Slide nested bake-pans and other articles packed between them 
 into the oven. 
 
 Place boiler covers on top of bake-pan; close oven door and 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 27 
 
 secure it with the iron rod provided for this purpose; wire this rod 
 to the staple. 
 
 Contents of Field Range No. 1 (Old Pattern). 
 Price, $23.18. 
 Price. Price 
 
 Boilers, nested (4) $1.11 Ladles, soup, 1 $0. 23 
 
 Choppers, meat, 1 1 21 Lanterns, folding, 2 1 .30 
 
 Cleaners, pot, 1 03 Pans, bake, small, 2 60 
 
 Cleavers, large, 1 57 Pipe, smoke, elbow, 2 . . . .27 
 
 Dippers, large, 1 32 Pipe, smoke, joints, 4. . . .15 
 
 Dredges, flour, 1 .09 Saws, meat, 1 64 
 
 Dredges, pepper, 1 05 Shovels, range, large, 1 . .06 
 
 Dredges, salt, 1 08 Sieves, flour, 1 35 
 
 Forks, large, 1 29 Skimmers, large, 1 20 
 
 Guards, tent, 1 (2 pieces) ... .10 Spoons, large, 1 . . 07 
 
 Knives, butcher, 1 27 Steels, butcher, 1 29 
 
 Ladles, pierced, 1 25 Turners, cake, 1 19 
 
 Field ranges should be kept properly packed at all times when 
 not actually in use. 
 
 Company commanders should verify the articles and replace 
 by purchase from local markets any missing article. They cannot 
 be replaced in any other manner, as these things are no longer an 
 article of issue. This is a proper charge against company funds. 
 
 If the range is to be packed and not used for any length of time, 
 boilers, dippers, and other equipment should be coated with cosmo- 
 line or paraffine, which is better. Cosmoline can be removed with 
 lye-water and paraffine will quickly boil off if the article is placed in 
 water. 
 
 If the above precautions are not taken, the range and its equip- 
 ment wiU become a mass of rust, which will utterly ruin everything 
 in a short time. 
 
 Circular ] ADJUTANT GENERAL'S OFFICE, 
 
 No. 3, V Office of the Insector-Instructor, 
 
 0. 1. 1. J Phoenix, Arizona, October 19, 1914. 
 
 Regulations for Folding Tents and Making Up 
 Blanket-Roll. 
 1. Spread shelter-half smoothly on the ground, buttons up 
 and triangular end to the front. Fold blanket once across its length 
 and place it upon shelter-half; fold toward the bottom edge, one- 
 half an inch from the square end, the same amount of canvas un- 
 covered at top and bottom. Place the pole on the side of the 
 blanket next the square of the shelter-half, near and parallel to the 
 fold, end of pole about 6 inches fiom the edge of the blanket. 
 Nest the pins near the opposite end of the blanket, and distribute the 
 
28 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 other articles carried in the loll (if any). Fold the triangular end 
 and then the exposed portion of the bottom of the shelter-half over 
 the blanket. The two men in each file roll and fasten first the rcU 
 of the front-rank and then the rear-rank man. File-closers work in 
 a similar manner — two and two. When the roll is completed, fasten 
 the center strap and then the end straps. With the roll so lying on 
 the ground that the edge of the shelter-half can }ust be seen when 
 looking vertically downward, one end is bent upward and over to 
 meet the other. Fasten and adjust blanket-roll straps or rope to 
 suit wearer. When the rolls are slung, the end containing the pole 
 should be to the rear. Shelter-halves should be so marked that the 
 crossed rifles will show, when the loll is slung, on the end that con- 
 tains the pole. An inspection will then show whether each man has 
 his own sheltei-half oi one belonging to another man or another 
 company. 
 
 To Fold Wall Tents. 
 
 2. Spread the tent flat on its side and place all guys but two 
 over the canvas; fold the triangular ends over so as to make the 
 canvas retcangular; fold both ends over so that they meet at the 
 center and then fold one end over on the other; fold the bottom and 
 ridge over so that they meet at the center of the strip, and then fold 
 one end over the other. Fold the fly into four folds parallel to its 
 length, then in a similar manner across its length, making a rectangle 
 with dimensions about the same as the folded tent. Place the fly 
 on the tent, cross the two free guys and tie them so that they pass 
 over the ends and across the sides. The hospital and common tents 
 are folded in the same manner as the wall tent. 
 
 To Fold Conical Tents. 
 
 3. Spread the tent flat with the door up; holding the ring 
 vertical, fold the two edges in so that they meet at the center and 
 again fold in the same manner; place the hood on one half and fold 
 the other half over it; turn wall over toward ring, fold the ring down, 
 placing knees on each fold to make bundle compact and flat. Tie 
 bundle with two free guys, as in case of wall tent. 
 
 4. In striking tents, common and wall tents are, unless other- 
 wise directed, lowered to the right, facing out from the tent door; 
 conical wall tents, away from the door. 
 
 To Fold Pyramidal Tents. 
 
 5. See Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911 edition. Paragraph 
 808. 
 
 Cromwell Stagey, 
 Captain U. S. Infantry, Inspector-Instructor. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY), 29 
 
 WAR DEPARTMENT, 
 Office of the Quartermaster General of the Army, 
 
 ^No^s'^ } Washington, May 18, 1914. 
 
 CJircular No. 16, Office of the Chief of the Quartermaster Corps, 
 June 12, 1913, is hereby revoked, and the following instructions 
 are given for instalUng and operating the Army field ranges Nos. 
 1 and 2, viz.: 
 
 The Army field range 'No. 1, complete, as described herein, 
 weighs approximately 264 pounds with utensils, and with the addi- 
 tion of the Alamo attachment is designed to cook for 150 men. It 
 consists essentially of two parts, viz.: the oven No. 41 and the 
 boiUng-plate; the boihng-plate has three sections. No. 42 and two 
 other parts, forming the Alamo attachment, Nos. 42A and 42B. 
 
 To pack the utensils and range for tiansportation, place the bake- 
 pan No. 52 on the ground. Set boiler No. 50 inside of bake-pan 
 No. 52; boiler No. 51 inside of boiler No. 50. Place tent-guards 
 inside of boiler No. 51 on bottom. Telescope the 4 joints of pipe. 
 Inside of the pipe place 2 forks, 3 knives, 1 sharpener, 1 cleaver, 
 and 2 folding lanterns. Place joints of pipe containing utenails 
 inside of boiler No. 51. Place meat-chopper in boiler No. 51 along- 
 side of joints of pipe. Place two basting-spoons, 1 meat-saw, and 1 
 skimmer in boiler No. 51 on top of pipe. Cover with lid No. 51, 
 then No. 50. Place bake-pan No. 52 upside down over lid No. 50. 
 Care should be taken that bake-pan handles are well down to sides 
 of the pan. Nest 4 boilers, Nos. 48, 49, 53, and 54, No. 48 outside. 
 Place stovepipe elbow in No. 54. Place dippers alongside of 
 elbows. Place covers Nos. 54, 53, 49, and 48 on boilers in order 
 named. Place nested boilers Nos. 48, 49, 53, and 54 in rear end of 
 oven. Place bake-pans and nested boilers in front end of oven. 
 Close the oven dooi and lock with damper lock. Place 42 A on left 
 front corner of oven No. 41 and 42B on right front corner, inserting 
 bar in crimp. This bar now rests against the pipe collar and pre- 
 vents sliding. Place boiling-plate No. 42 on top of range, eye 
 fitting over stovepipe flange and engaging under the flat hook. 
 Make secure by fastening hook on front of boiling-plate to the lug 
 on back of range. The range is now secure for transportation. 
 
 Installing the Range. 
 (See Fig. 1.) 
 On the march the range is ordinarily set up by simply levehng 
 the ground selected and placing the oven No. 41 and boiUng-plate 
 No. 42 side by side, so that the oven door and fire-box door will 
 be at the same end. Draw in 42A and 42B and secure bar-lock. 
 Insert 42A into 42 and rest 42B snugly on the angle iron on the rear 
 of the range. The oven should not be banked, as this would cause 
 
30 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 the sheet iron along the sides to warp and finally bum through. 
 
 Sufficient earth, however, s^hould be tamped along the sides and 
 closed end to prevent the passage of gaees beneath. This earth 
 should not extend above the straps along the sides and undei 
 the oven door. 
 
 When used for one day only (see Fig. 3), it will be necessary to 
 dig a trench, but if a few shovelfuls of earth are removed from the 
 place to be covered by the boiling-plate, it will facilitate firing. 
 The best results are obtained by using short wood— keeping the 
 fire well toward the firing end of the boiling-plate; or, if using long 
 sticks and branches, pushing them under the boiling-plate as they . 
 are consumed. 
 
 Trenching. 
 (See Fig. 2.) 
 
 If the range is to remain in place for several days, it is best to 
 dig a trench (except in sandy soil) about 18 inches wide by 6 inches 
 deep and the length of the boiling-plate, say 6 feet, sloping upwaid 
 to about 5 inches in depth at back end. When installed, the trench 
 should extend under the boiling-plate and about 1 foot under the 
 Alamo attachment^ust enough to facilitate the draft — and about 
 6 inches under the oven. When the range is set up on different 
 ground daily, no difficulty will be experienced in obtaining the 
 proper temperature in the oven, both for top and bottom heat. 
 Whenever it remains for a longer time than one day in the same 
 spot, the ground will become dried out and hot, and it may be nec- 
 esirary to elevate the bake-pans from the bottom of the oven about 
 2 inches above the floor of the oven. This can be easily done by 
 the use of angle irons or other convenient means, thereby causing 
 an air-space under the receptacle in which the baking or roasting 
 is being done. Never use earth or sand on the bottom of the oven 
 chamber, for by so doing a hole will soon be burned in the bottom 
 plate. 
 
 If the range is to be used for a considerable length of time in one 
 place, cooks wiU find a greater ease in cooking if a trench about 
 18 inches wide and 1 foot deep is dug along the side of the boiling- 
 plate and oven. This will greatly lessen the labor in frying, baking 
 hot cakes, etc. The inside edge of the trench should be about 1 
 foot from the range. 
 
 At times it may be necessary to install this range for cooking on 
 a railroad car or on a wooden floor of a house, shed, etc. To install, 
 erect a frame 12 inches high, 6 feet long, and 4 feet 6 inches wide; 
 fiU with sand and set the oven and boiling-plate on top of the sand, 
 anchoring firmly in place. If clay is available, remove all stones, 
 pebbles, etc., add salt water and sand; this foundation will become 
 hard and solid and will prevent the burning of the floor. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 31 
 
 Eliminating Trenches and Installing on Bricks Where Same 
 Are Available. 
 
 Level the giound or use a brick floor. Set up range temporarily 
 and mark outline on the level ground or brick floor, after which 
 remove the range and parts and construct an 8-inch wall three bricks 
 high on the outline and on line between the oven and boiUng-plate 
 for support of same. Assemble range on walls; under oven place 
 brick on edge with three-fourths inch spaces for conservation of 
 heat. Fire-box channel under boiling-plate No. 42 and gas chamber 
 under Alamo attachment Nos. 42A and 42B to be formed between 
 brick wall supports. Bank outside of brick walls at sides and back 
 of range with clean earth, sloped about 1 to 2. 
 
 In a permanent camp (see Fig. 4) it is frequently necessary to 
 evaporate waste under the range and to consume the garbage by 
 the same fire. In this case dig a pit about 4 feet long, 33^ feet 
 wide, and 2 feet deep to give a reservoir for waste water. Fill the 
 pit with cobblestones, making large cavities, and leaving a fire-box 
 and gas chamber under boiling-plate and Alamo attachment, as 
 suggested for temporary installation. Place a length of stovepipe 
 or any kind of chute at a convenient place anywhere along the side 
 of the oven, arranging the rocks on which it rests so that there will 
 be a free passage for the water. Pour in the waste water as it ac- 
 cumulates, retaining all sohd matter by a wire screen, the solid 
 matter to be burned in the trench under the boiling-plate, a little 
 at a time, or, perhaps better, after the meal has been prepared. 
 Great care must be exercised in garbage incineration to prevent 
 injury to the metal of the range. 
 
 Reassembling for Transportation. 
 When breaking camp and reassembling for transportation, draw 
 boiling-plate No. 42 foiward. Unfasten bar-lock, pull apart, and 
 remove 42 A and 42B, and proceed as indicated above. 
 
 Remarks ON Handling the Range. 
 
 If properly installed, the oven will not be too hot on the bottom 
 for ordinary baking, owing to the fact that the fire does not strike 
 the range proper. A tin will be found inside the baking chamber 
 which may be used if for any reason the bottom of the oven is too 
 hot. Should the bottom of the oven be too cold for efficient baking, 
 the tin should be removed. Articles brought to a boil on the 
 boiling-plate will continue to simmer if set on top of the oven or if 
 placed close alongside the oven, the ground being leveled for the 
 purpose. In this manner a dinner has been prepared for an entire 
 battalion by adding the necessary utensils. A little care and 
 judgment only is necessary to secure satisfactory results. 
 
 Coal should never be used when wood is obtainable. If possible, 
 
32 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 even when coal is used, part of the fuel should be wood, for the use 
 of coal alone will quickly destroy the range. 
 
 In permanent camp the space above and on the sides of the 
 oven and the stovepipe should be cleaned at least once a week. 
 This also applies to the boihng-plates. The range, boihng-plates, 
 and piped should be coated with a mixture of sugar and grease, 
 this preservative preventing rusting and gives a neat, poHshed 
 appearance to the lange. 
 
 Army Field Range No. 2. 
 
 The Army field range No. 2, complete, weighs about 150 pounds 
 with utensils and is designed to cook for 55 men. This range is 
 without the Alamo attachment. It consists essentially of two 
 parts— the oven. No. 61, and boiling-plate, No. 62. For transpor- 
 tation the boiling-plate is placed on top of the oven and the utensils 
 (with flue) packed within the oven chamber. 
 
 On the march the range is set up ordinarily, from day to day, by 
 simply leveling the ground to be covered by it, removing the boiling- 
 plate and placing it in the position shown, the projecting collar being 
 slipped into the space cut from one end of the oven for that purpose. 
 The best results are obtained when using short wood, keeping the 
 fire well towaid the firing end of the boihng-plate; or, if using long 
 sticks and branches, pushing them under the boiling-plate (never 
 under the oven) as tney are consumed. 
 
 If the range is to remain in place for several days (see Fig. A), it 
 is best to dig a trench (except in sandy soil) about 16 inches wide by 
 6 inches deep, and of sufficienb length for free service, say 5 feet. 
 When installed, the tiench should extend under the boiling-plate 
 and about 3 inches under the oven^ust enough to prevent choking 
 of the draft. If the flame is allowed to play freely on the bottom 
 of the oven chamber, it will become too hot for baking, and the 
 bottom of the oven will bum out prematurely. 
 
 In a permanent camp (see Fig. B) it is frequently necessary to 
 evaporate waste under the range and consume garbage by the same 
 fire. In this case, dig a pit about 6 feet long, 2 feet wide, and 2 feet 
 deep, to give a reservoir foi waste water. Fill the pit with cobble- 
 stones, making laige cavities and leaving a trench for fire-box under 
 boiling-plate, as suggested for temporary installation. 
 
 Place a length of stovepipe, or any kind of chute, at a convenient 
 place alongside of oven, arranging rock on which it rests for a free 
 passage of waste water to pit. 
 
 Pour in the waste water as it accumulates, letaining all soHd 
 matter by a wire screen, the solid matter to be burned in the trench 
 under boiling-plate a littie at a time, or perhaps better after the 
 meal has been prepared. Great care must be exercised in garbage 
 incineration to prevent injury to the metal of the range. 
 
 To pack utensils and range for transportation, place bake-pan 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 33 
 
 TRACES^ cffu &A%,JSz., I 
 
 5oi.ip a*'Nei& ^HQiH TicfeMCH)W6l 
 
34 
 
 COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 
 
 f=i6.3: 
 
 |L pent A>46M c«j.iNti.S&& pol^ n 
 
 41 
 
 iHL 
 
 4-1. 
 
 =4S-= 
 
 ^3_ 
 
 
 flG.4- 
 
 1 
 
 IS 
 
 4:^71 
 
 "^ 
 
 k 
 
 \/L2. *.l 
 
 t 
 
 
 UTo^i^Xfe-STPrtE: p;T/ »F usep^ ^Ff ^^^^ 
 
 p/6. 1^ SyceKM op A^My pBLP RxrtGE H^l m/ith "Aumq' 
 
 pi6.Z- SKercM opTf^&KcmHG for 5AMe k u • 
 pf6.3- ^« " Ram^El^witm or without T<^e^*<^*< 
 
 pi6.4. It u ^ .*• TeeMcw AMP pix. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 35 
 
 P<Si.A. 
 
 ^/^'*ff<^ff<{/^ ^<y///>^>%^ 
 
 a 
 
 Ouen 
 
 ^ 
 
 Oyfn 
 oCoor. 
 
 T'Ci. ^. 
 
 Ou<pn, 
 
 J^tr/ry^ €^d^ ff^J/fhg F/at? , ^ y 
 
 Oyent 
 cCoor. 
 
 ^n: 
 
 ^ 
 
 I coBBte-sTOMB prx. J 
 
 Sketches op^^^kmy f'^^p Rai^Cis Mo. 2. 
 
 PCJ, A.^KerCH 01= RaH<5£,W>TH or WfTHOUT T(?eNcH I 
 
36 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 No. 52 on the ground. Set boiler No. 50 inside of bake-pan No. 52; 
 boiler No. 51 inside of boiler No. 50.^ Place tent-guards on bottom 
 of boiler No. 51. Telescope the 4 joints of stovepipe. Inside of 
 pipe place 2 forks, 2 knives, 1 sharpener, 2 spoons, 1 lantern (folding), 
 and 1 skimmer. Place the joints of pipe containing utensils in 
 boiler No. 51. Place dipper and elbow alongside the pipe. Place 
 meat-saw in bake-pan No. 52 alongside of boilers. Cover boilers 
 with lids No. 51 and No. 50. Place bake-pan No. 52 upside down 
 over hd No. 50. Place pans in the range oven. Place the boiling- 
 plate at the door end of the oven. Engage the flanges on the in- 
 ner side of boiling-plate with the lugs on the door end of the 
 oven. Fasten the hook on boihng-plate (firing end) to lug above 
 the handle on the closed end of oven. The range is now secure for 
 transportation. (441575.) 
 
 By order of the Secretary of War: 
 
 J. B. Aleshire, 
 Approved: Quartermaster General. 
 
 Geo. Andrews, 
 
 The Adjutant General. 
 
 General Orders, \ WAR DEPARTMENT, 
 
 No. 10. / Washington, February 18, 1914. 
 
 I. The foUowmg instructions prescribing standard packing- 
 boxes for shipment of quartermaster supplies between depots, posts, 
 and stations, and from depots, posts, or stations to troops in the 
 field, marks to be placed on such boxes and other packages for 
 shipment, and marks on quartermaster suppUes for issue, are pub- 
 lished for the information and guidance of all concerned: 
 1. Standard Packing-Boxes. 
 
 Packing-boxes 38 by 19 by 15 inches, outside measurement, 
 meet nearly all requirements for escort wagon, motor truck, pack 
 animal, or water transport, and accordingly all quartermaster sup- 
 plies intended for field service will, when practicable, be packed in 
 boxes of such dimensions, constructed of suitable light but durable 
 material (ordinarily not exceeding 3^-inch sides and 1-inch ends), 
 and bound around ends and center when necessary with suitable 
 hoop iron or wire, weight not to exceed 150 pounds gross. 
 
 Sacking or baling will be substituted for boxes whenever prac- 
 ticable, and when necessary to use smaller boxes, same should be 
 exact subdivisions of corresponding dimensions of the standard box. 
 
 By reducing the number of articles the standard size and gross 
 weight limit of box adapts itself to most quartermaster supplies. 
 2. Exceptions. 
 
 (a) In exceptional cases where conformity to the standard 
 weight limit would destroy the unity of equipment and separate 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 37 
 
 component parts, the loss of any one of which would render the 
 others useless, the gross weight of the standard-size box may exceed 
 150 pounds. 
 
 (6) In exceptional cases, where suppUes are now packed in 
 boxes or bales of less than 150 pounds gross weight, and the di- 
 mensions of which, determined by the nature of the supplies and the 
 number of units necessarily carried, are within the standard di- 
 mensions, same may be packed as heretofore. 
 
 (c) In othei exceptional cases the height of the standard box 
 may be shghtly varied, the length and breadth being adhered to. 
 
 (d) Subsistence Stores.— Unless otherwise directed, subsistence 
 stores will, when practicable, be shipped in containers in which re- 
 ceived or containers of similar dimensions. The weight of any one 
 box of subsistence stores prepared for shipment to posts should not 
 exceed 100 pounds gross. The gross weight of barrels may, however, 
 exceed 100 pounds. 
 
 3. Marks on Packages. 
 
 Shipping.— When space permits, name or initials of consignee 
 and address wiU be marked on top surface of package, box, etc., and 
 on the ends U. S. number, contents, gross, tare, and net weight, 
 name of seller or contraactor, or, if packed or repacked by Quarter- 
 master Corps, date packed and initials of packers. Also, when 
 practicable, the insignia of the Quartermaster Corps will be stamped 
 on both ends of each box, crate, barrel, etc., of quartermaster sup- 
 plies, and in addition, to readily distinguish subsistence stores, a 
 crescent 3 inches in height and 2 inches in width will be stamped in 
 red or othei conspicuous color on both ends of all packages con- 
 taining subsistence stores. 
 
 Exception. — Where it is not practicable to mark contents on 
 boxes, etc., with stencil or brush, the contents wiU be listed on heavy 
 paper by use of typewriter or pen, the Hst attached by means of 
 tacks or paste, and the hst then given a Jight coat of varnish to 
 prevent obHteration by rain or moisture. 
 
 4. Specifications for Stencil Plates. 
 
 For marking property for shipment, a complete set of stencil 
 plates consists of two full alphabets, Roman capitals (including the 
 usual mark for ^'and^'), and two series of numbers from 1 to 0. 
 One set of letters and numbers is 1 inch, the other 3^ incn high. 
 They are cut on plates of sheet brass. No. 28, the larger 2J^ by 2 
 inches, the smaller 1 M by 1 ^ inches. The upper edge of each plate 
 is turned up so as to form a rim about H inch high. These plates 
 are issued in japanned tin boxes, 83^ inches long, 4 inches wide, and 
 1% inches high, with hinged lids. Each box contains, besides the 
 full set of stencils, a cake of marking paste in tin box, a sponge, and 
 a stencil brush. Printed directions for the use of the latter materials 
 are attached to the inside of the lid. 
 
38 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 5. These instructions are not to be construed as prohibiting 
 the use by supply depots of crates of suitable dimensions in the 
 shipment of tentage and other supplies which experience has shown 
 can be more advantageously and economically transported in that 
 form of container. 
 
 6. The requirements of Section 4, Paragraph I., of this order, 
 as to the use of stencil plate sets, do not apply to depots and other 
 points equipped with stencil-cutting machines. 
 
 7. Marks on Articles. 
 
 All non-expendable articles of quartermaster supplies hereafter 
 procured will be marked with the letters ''U. S. Q. M. C." in one of 
 the three following sizes, according to the tool or article: 
 
 Size 1, with letters Vie inch high. 
 
 Size 2, with letters ^ inch high. 
 
 Size 3, with letters 1 inch high. 
 
 The marking of all tools will be done under the direction of the 
 purchasing officer. 
 
 8. The following will be supplied to posts as a Class A supply : 
 
 Q. M. C, 1 inch. 
 
 U. S., 1 inch. 
 
 Numerals, 1 inch (from to 9, inclusive). 
 
 Stencil plates, sets, complete. 
 
 Rubber stamp, insignia of the Quartermaster Corps, and 
 crescent stencil plate sets. 
 
 9. Old Marks. 
 
 When boxes, crates, barrels, etc., which have been used in the 
 transportation of supphes are again used as containers in the ship- 
 ment of supplies, care must be taken that all old marks are ob- 
 Hterated. (2124765, A. G. O.) 
 
 II. Circular No. 9, Office of the Quartermaster General, 1909, 
 is rescinded. (2124765, A. G. O.) 
 
 By order of the Secretary of War : 
 
 Leonard Wood, 
 Official: Major General, Chief of Staff. 
 
 Geo. Andrews, 
 
 The Adjutant General. 
 
 General Orders, \ WAR DEPARTMENT, 
 
 No. 26. / Washington, August 16, 1912. 
 
 I. With a view to increasing the marching capacity of troops, 
 company commanders will personally measure the feet and fit the 
 shoes of men of their commands, and will be held responsible that 
 the instiuctions herein contained are strictly followed. 
 
 All measurements prescribed herein will be taken with the 
 soldier standing in bare feet and with a 40-pound burden on his 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 3d 
 
 back, bearing the entire weight upon the foot to be measured, 
 Balance may be preserved by resting the hand on a fixed object. 
 The measurements of the foot, which must be taken to make suita- 
 ble preliminary selection of the shoe to try on, are: (a), the length; 
 (6), the circumference around the ball. 
 
 To measure the length the soldier will stand with foot upon 
 the foot measure, furnished by the Quartermaster's Department, 
 fitted in a slot on a board, the heel of the soldier fitting snugly 
 against the heel-block. The movable block will then be pushed up 
 until it touches the end of the great toe. The scale on the top of 
 the measure, which is graduated in sizes, will then be read, and the 
 proper length of the shoe will be determined, approximately, by 
 adding 2 to the reading of the scale; thus, if the soldier's foot scales 
 63^, a shoe not smaller than 83^ should be tried on first. 
 
 To take the ball measure, pass the foot tape, supplied by the 
 Quartermaster's Department, aiound the foot at the prominent 
 tubercle at the base of the great toe and the prominent tubercle at 
 the base of the little toe. The position of the tape is shown by the 
 line A— B in the diagram below : 
 
 The tape should lie closely to the flesh, but should not be so 
 tight as to compress it. Having taken the foregoing measurements, 
 the shoe best suited to the foot will be determined by reference to 
 
40 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Circular No. 10, Quartermaster General's Office, April 0, 1912. 
 For example, assume that the circumference of the ball is found to 
 be 9}<C inches. In the table on page 28 of the aforesaid circular, 
 under the heading ''Marching Shoes," it will be seen that for a foot 
 requiring an 8)^ shoe a ball measurement of 9}^ inches corresponds 
 to a D width. The size of shoe to try on for actual fitting is, then, 
 in this case, 83^ D. 
 
 If the ball measurement found as above does not correspond 
 exactly with any ball measurement given in the table, then the nar- 
 rower of the two widths between which the measurement lies should 
 be selected. 
 
 Beginning with the size and width thus tentatively selected, 
 shoes will be tried on until a satisfactory fit is secured. Correct fit 
 in waist and instep will be determined experimentally. To de- 
 termine the fact of fit, the shoe will be laced snugly, and the soldier 
 with a 40-pound burden upon his back will again throw his entire 
 weight on one foot. The officer will then press in the leather of the 
 shoe in front of the toes to determine the existence of sufficient vacant 
 space in that region to prevent toe injury. Under no circum- 
 stances should this vacant space in front of the great toe be less than 
 % inch; nor should there be pressure on the top of the toes. The 
 officer will then grasp with his hand the leather of the shoe over the 
 ball. As his fingers and thumb are brought slowly together over the 
 leather, the shoe should feel snugly filled without apparent tension, 
 while the leather should lie smoothly under the hand. If the 
 leather wrinkles under the grasp of the hand, the shoe is too wide 
 and a narrower width is needed; if the leather seems tense and 
 bulging and the hands tend to slip over easily, the shoe is too nanow 
 and a greater width is necessary. 
 
 It may be necessary to try on several pairs of shoes in this 
 manner before an entirely satisfactory shoe is secured. A record 
 of the proper size and width of shoes as determined above will be 
 kept as provided in Circular No. 10, Quartermastei Generars Office, 
 April 6, 1912. 
 
 Measurements will be taken and shoes will be fitted as pre- 
 scribed at least once in each enlistment, and the record will be 
 changed from time to time, if subsequent fittings render a change 
 necessary. 
 
 Sizes called for in requisitions will conform to the record, and 
 the fact of fit of shoes issued on such requisitions will be personally 
 verified in every instance by company commanders in the manner 
 above prescribed. 
 
 No shoes will be issued to or worn by enlisted men while on 
 duty which are net fitted in accordance with this order. 
 
 New shoes should be adapted to the contours of the feet as 
 soon as possible. Shoe-sti etchers, with adjustable knobs, to take 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 41 
 
 pressure off painful corns and bunions, are issued by the Quarter- 
 mastei^s Depaitment. 
 
 All shoes should be properly bioken in before beginning a 
 march, but if this is impracticable, then the following is suggested, 
 but not required: 
 
 The soldier stands in his new shoes in about 23/2 inches of water 
 for about five minutes until the leather is thoroughly pUable and 
 moist; he should then walk for about an hour on a level suiface, 
 letting the shoes dry on his feet, to the irregularities of which the 
 leather is thus molded in the same way as it was previously molded 
 oyer the shoe last. On taking the shoes off a veiy Uttle neaf^'s-foot 
 oil should be lubbed into the leather to prevent its hardening and 
 cracking. 
 
 If it is desired to water-proof the shoes at any time, a consid- 
 erable amount of neat's-foot oil should be rubbed into the leather. 
 
 Light woolen or heavy woolen socks will habitually be worn 
 for marching; the socks will be large enough to permit free move- 
 ment of the toes, but not so loose as to permit of wiinkhng. Darned 
 socks, or socks with holes, will not be worn in marching. 
 
 Company commanders, by frequent inspections throughout 
 the year, will maintain the feet of their men in condition for proper 
 marching. They will cause the proper trimming of nails, removal 
 or paring of corns and callouses, relief of painful bunions, treatment 
 of ingrowing nails, and other defects, sending serious <»ases to the 
 surgeon. 
 
 Before a march is imdertaken by foot troops, company com- 
 manders will personally inspect the bare feet of their men. While 
 on the march they will personally see each day that their men wash 
 their feet as soon as possible after reaching camp, prick and evacuate 
 blisters and cover such blisters or excoriations with zinc oxide 
 plaster, supplied by the Medical Department, applied hot, dust the 
 feet with the foot powder supplied by the Medical Department, and 
 put on clean socks. Hereafter an undue amount of foot injury and 
 disability from shoes will be regarded as evidence of inefficiency on 
 the part of the officers concerned and as causes for investigation. 
 
 Post quartermasters will provide a place in the quartermaster's 
 store-house where shoes may -be fitted for the purpose of determining 
 or verifying the record required by General Ordeis, No. 48, Wax- 
 Department, 1911. For the purpose of fitting, they will keep on 
 hand at all times a complete series of each size and width of shoes 
 furnished for issue. Shoes of this series will be put in stock and 
 issued before they become unserviceable and will be replaced by 
 new shces, keeping the series always complete. Company com- 
 manders will report in writing to the post commanders every intance 
 of failure to secure proper shoes for their commands or to obtain 
 (Coniintied on page 44-) 
 
4^ 
 
 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 CORRECT METHOD OF ATTACfflNG EQUIPMENT 
 TO FIELD BELT. 
 
 Bayonet may be placed under haversack if full of rations. 
 
 CORRECT METHOD OF ARRANGING ARTICLES IN 
 SHELTER TENT FOR INSPECTION. 
 
 7?A7i^ 
 
 ^^/c 
 
 BLANKET 
 
 W^y^^'d'mM>f^i;t^6m^ ^OA^CM O ^ V>W^v VSF?^ 
 
 Office of Inspector-Instructor, 
 National Guard of Arizona. 
 
 Campbell Stacey, 
 Instructor-Inspector. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 43 
 
 PRESCRIBED METHOD OF CARRYING EQUIPMENTS 
 ON FIELD BELT. 
 
 Haversack — Hooked in front of first cartridge pocket g,nd in rear 
 
 of third. 
 Bayonet — Hooked in rear of first cartridge pocket (left side) over 
 
 haversack (under, if full). 
 First Aid Packet — Under the ninth pocket. 
 Intrenching Tool — Hooked in rear of sixth cartridge pocket. 
 Canteen — Hooked in rear of seventh cartridge pocket. 
 Suspenders — Hooked in front and rear of first and second and eighth 
 
 and ninth cartridge pockets, and outside of fifth and sixth. 
 
 Buckles to the front and coming up under strap (not over). 
 
 Buckle on rear strap on right side. 
 Mess Pan, Etc. — In haversack. 
 Tin Cup — Will be carried in haversack. 
 
 ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT FOR INSPECTION 
 IN SHELTER TENT. 
 
 Poncho— Folded as prescribed, on ground between pole and side of 
 tent. 
 
 Blanket — Folded as prescribed, on top of poncho. 
 
 Cup, containing Knife, Fork, Spoon, and Toothbrush — On blanket 
 next to front pole, handle to rear. 
 
 Mess Pan — Open, on blanket next to cup, end of handle to rear. 
 
 Housewife — Next to mess pan. 
 
 Socks — In rear of housewife (folded) . 
 
 Towel — Neatly folded, with soap and comb on top. 
 
 Other Clothmg— (If any.) 
 
 Salt, Sugar, and Coffee Sacks — On top of one another, but so ar- 
 ranged that all will show next to clothing. 
 
 Blanket Roll Straps — At end of blanket next to side of tent. 
 
44 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 proper facilities for fitting the shoes as herein directed. Post com- 
 manders will investigate the reasons for, and be held responsible as 
 far as hes in their power for the rectification of, such deficiencies. 
 
 A brief record of the number of such reports from company 
 commandeiB and the reason for such deficiencies will be furnished to 
 inspectors at each inspection of the post. 
 
 Inspections conducted under the provisions of Paragraph 913, 
 Army Regulations, will embrace an inquiry into the manner in which 
 this ordei has been complied with, and the report of inspections will 
 include a statement of aU instances of failure on the part of company 
 commanders to secure proper shoes for their commands and the 
 cause of such failure. (1856626R, A. G. O.) 
 
 II. A new pattern shoe has been adopted for the service 
 which, when the old stock shall have been exhausted, will supersede 
 the different patterns now on hand in the Quartermaster's Depart- 
 ment. Hereafter, until the old supply is exhausted, requisitions 
 for shoes will be filled from stocK on hand, irrespective of pattern 
 or finish. (1856626S A. G. O.) 
 
 By order of the oecretaiy of War: 
 
 Leonard Wood, 
 Official: Major General, Chief of Staff. 
 
 Geo. Andrews, 
 
 The Adjutant General. 
 
 I^''. The rection (page 3) o|f Paragraph I., General Orders » 
 No. 26, War Department, August 16, 1912, that prescribes the 
 habitual wearing of Ught woolen or heavy woolen socks for marching, 
 is amended to read as follows: 
 
 Light woolen or heavy woolen stockings will habitually be 
 worn for maiching, but commanding officers of organizp^tions may 
 authorize the wearing of Ootton stockings in individual cases where 
 the surgeon certifies to the fact that the wearing of such stockings 
 subserves the best interests of the Sjervice. The stocking's will be 
 large enough to permit free moVement of the toeSj, but not so loose 
 as to permit of wrinkhng. Darned stockings or stockings with holes 
 will not be worn in marching. (2025438, A. G. O.) 
 
 By order of the Secretary of War: 
 
 W. W. WOTHERSPOON, 
 
 Official: Major Geneial, Acting Chief of Staff. 
 
 Geo. Andrews, 
 
 The Adjutant General. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 45 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 INSTRUCTION AND DRILL. 
 
 The instruction imparted to the average soldier in the National 
 Guard is usually superficial, follows no well-defined scheme, and, 
 in consequence, the men do not receive the amount of training that 
 really can be given to a soldier of the Guard under our present 
 system. We all know that the system is fundamentally wrong, 
 but it is all we have; so, instead of damning it, let us try to do the 
 best we can with the means at hand. If every officer in the Guard 
 would do this, it is skfe to assume that the di^cipUne, training, and 
 efficiency of the National Guard could be improved at least 50 per 
 cent in a year. 
 
 The average officer of the National Guard must first earn his 
 living and then devote his spare time to his company. Frequently 
 he has not the time or experience to prepare a systematic coui'se of 
 instruction for training his company. The object of this little book 
 is to place in his hands a system that has been thought out and put 
 to the practical test in training a regiment in the National Guard, 
 and has not been found wanting in any esislential particular. If 
 followed through exactly as laid down, the captain who uses it will 
 find that his company has received a foundation upon which a solid 
 military structure can be built. 
 
 Division of Time in Company Training. 
 
 Drills usually commence in September and continue until June, 
 when summer eamps ojp maneuvers are held. Drills are larely held 
 until some time after sVunmer camp. The National Guard company 
 cd'mmander can usually figui^ on thirty drills during this period, if 
 his company drills every weej^. There are always events— auto- 
 mobile shows, dances, conventions, etc. — which, by utilizing the 
 armory, interfeie with drilig; parades and holidays also cut down 
 the time. Happy indeed is the National Guard captain who can 
 confidently figure on thirty diills before going to camp. 
 
 The following schedule will enable you to divide your time as 
 follows: 
 
46 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Thirteen recruit and squad drills 13 
 
 Seven company drills, close and extended order 7 
 
 Ten drills preparatory to target practice 10 
 
 Total 30 
 
 This leaves no time for bayonet exercise or first-aid instruction. 
 It is assumed that each drill will be for 1 hour — the usual time. Bay- 
 onet exercise and first-aid instruction can be given only if you can 
 prolong your drill 3^ hour; this will give you 15 additional hours 
 of drill; devote 11 of them to bayonet exercise and 4 to first-aid 
 drill, each drill J^ hour. 
 
 You should also have non-commissioned officers' school at least 
 1 hour each week; this will give you 30 hours for this purpose. 
 Devote 15 hours to Part IJ., "Infantry Drill Regulations," Para- 
 graphs 350 to 707, inclusive; divided into 15 lessons, this will give 
 you an average lesson of 24 paragraphs, which is not too long. 
 
 Devote 5 hours to map-ieading. You scarcely have time to 
 learn map-making. The berft book qp this subject that I know of is 
 "Military Map-Reading, Field Outpost and Road Sketching,'' by 
 Beach. 
 
 Devote 10 hours to "Small Arms Firing Manual, U. S. Army," 
 1913, Paragraphs 12 to 118 and Paragraphs 200 to 221, inclusive; 
 this gives you 127 paragraphs, or an average lesson of 13 para- 
 graphs, which is not too much to be assimilated. 
 
 It may be noted that no time is devoted to "Field Service 
 Regulations"; you have not the cime. The lectures 1 to 10 cover 
 about all that your men would get out of them any way, and besides, 
 they are not ready for a study of them yet. If you have the same 
 non-commissioned officers next year (forlorn hope), it will be time to 
 take them up then. It may be noted that this couise only provides 
 a course of instruction for the first year. It has been the expeiience 
 of the writer that it is almost useless to prescribe a comprehensive 
 course of training extending over more than one year, because your 
 men in the Guard change so rapidly. If such a course is necessary, 
 and you have honestly followed the above course, you will have 
 gained enough experience to prescribe one for the needs of your 
 company better than the writer can now do, not being familiar with 
 your special needs and conditions. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 47 
 
 It may be noticed that no time is allowed for pitching the large 
 tents or foi drill in Butts' Manual; you have not the time to waste 
 on these. You will learn to pitch large tents in two days if you ever 
 go into the field, and Butts' Manual is valuable only if given as a 
 short daily drill; it has no value whatever if given once a week. It 
 takes a long time to leain the movements correctly, and it is of no 
 value to you as a show drill unle^^s you can execute the movements 
 in cadence. You cannot acquiie this precision without alighting 
 more important woik. 
 
 In teaching bayonet exeicise, complete your recruit, squad, or 
 company drill fiist, and then devote the extia half-hour to bayonet 
 exercise. More than half an hour at a time devoted to bayonet 
 drill is too long. The men become tired and lose inte^eet. Fiirft-aid 
 instruction can be given in a similar manner. 
 
 The course outlined aboVe does not allow enough drills to be- 
 come perfect in the movemem-s, but every movement can be taught, 
 and it should not take your company long to attain a reasonable 
 degree of peifection if you aie ordered into the field and can diill 
 your men daily. If you are so fortunate as to be able to drill your 
 men for two nours a week or two drills of two houis each per week, 
 you will have ample time to attain consideiable perfection in the 
 execution of movements. It will be noted that the schedule is very 
 elastic. The mere time you have at your disposal the more time 
 you can devote to each movement, and that without alte. ing youi 
 general scheme. If you can inculcate a good, healthy spirit in your 
 men and get them interested in the work, you should not have very 
 much difficulty in getting your men to drill three or foui hours per 
 week. I know of one company in the Guard that had such a good 
 spirit that the men averaged seven hours^ diill a week for two 
 months, and that without any pressure from the captain. The men 
 wanted to learn to be soldiers, and willingly gave the time. I have 
 steen these men driU three and four hours on Sundaj^s. 
 
 It is not claimed by the writer that the following coursp, with 
 the time devoted to each subject, will develop ciained soldiers, but 
 it is believed that the time alloted to each is absolutely the minimum 
 to produce any results at all. If you are so foitunate as to be able 
 to give your men more drill, so much the better; but I believe that 
 
48 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 if the course is followed, your men will have received a good, solid 
 foundation upon which a solid military structure can be evelitually 
 built, and 3^0 ur men will have received more real s|ysteinatic in- 
 struction than is usually given the National Guardshian. 
 Complete Recruit Course. 
 
 To be given alsb to eve'ry officer and man in the company who 
 has not previously received it. It doeh hot mattejr how long a man 
 has been in the National Guard or how well drilled he is or thinks he 
 is, he should take this complete colirse. If he really is a well-drilled 
 man, it will not hurt him, and he will know his drill better than he 
 did befo're; if he is not well drilled, it naturally follows that he 
 needs it. 
 
 The basis of efficiency depends largely upon the foundation 
 laid in recruit drill. Nothing is gained by slighting this very im- 
 portant instruction. No organization can ever hope to be efficient 
 or rise above mediocrity whosfe recruit instruction is not thorough. 
 
 Remember, closb-ordei drill is principally to impart discipline 
 to your cotomand. Unless your drill is very exact and snappy, and 
 unless you correct every mistake that is mad e, you are wasting your 
 time absolutely. 
 
 Extended-oWer drill is to teach your men to maneuver in the 
 presence of the enemy. Unless you put life into it and explain the 
 object of every movement and insist that each one be correctly 
 executed, you are again wasting your time and will never attain 
 efficiency. 
 
 Battle exercises are for the purpose of training officers and men 
 in battle tactics; they must be w^ell thought out beforehand, must 
 be handled intelligently, and must always teach a military lesson. 
 
 First DriIll. 
 
 Time, two hours. 
 
 Issue armsj, equipment, and uniform. Don't take it for granted 
 that every man is properly uniformed and equipped; ins'pect him 
 and find out, down to the sight cover and oiler, brush, and thong 
 in the butt of his rifle, whether he is properly equipped or not. 
 
 Instruct men how to salute, who to salute, and when to salute. 
 (See Paragraphs 58 and 758, I. D. R.) 
 
 Teach men how to assemble equipment; this means that they 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 49 
 
 must know how the suspenders go on the belt and where each article 
 of the equipment should be carried. The U. S. Ordnance Depart- 
 ment issues a pamphlet, "Description of the Infantry Equipment," 
 1910, also one describing the infantry equipment, old pattern. 
 You can get thes'e by writing for them to the Chief of Oidnance, 
 U. S. Army. Get them. 
 
 Men should be taught how to pitch the shelter tent. Nails can 
 be driven in the armory floor to serve as tent-pins. 
 
 . Men must be taught how to make up the blanket-roll, if you 
 have the old-style equipment. (See appendix to first chapter.) The 
 manual referred to above will show you how to pack the new model 
 equipment. 
 
 The first question which will naturally arise in your mind is, 
 '•Can this instruction be given in two hours?" Yes, it can and has 
 been repeatedly given in that time; but, in order to do this, you 
 must have system. 
 
 Let us assume that you have a squad of eight men to receive 
 this instruction or first lesson. The first sergeant will assign lockers 
 to these men and give them a s lip of paper on which is the man's 
 company numbejr. (Locker should bear this same number.) The 
 men then report to the quartermaster sergeant, who will fit and 
 issue uniforms to them. They then pass to the artificer, who will 
 issue equipment and arms, taking up the slip of paper given to the 
 men by the first sergeant. (This slip indicates to the artificer the 
 number of the equipment that he will issue to each man.) Re- 
 member, each article of equipment should be marked with a numbei . 
 For instance, the company number given to a recruit is No. 12. 
 Every article of equipment issued to him should bear this number- - 
 shelter tent half, blanket, haversack, canteen, etc. If your equip- 
 ment is marked in this manner, it will not get lost or misplaced. 
 The men then pass to a sergeant, who will teach them to assemble 
 their equipment. He then teaches them to pitch the shelter tent. 
 Nails can be driven in floor for pegs. They are then taught to make 
 up the blariket-roll. When the rolls are made up, the men are taken 
 to their pegs in the company-room, shown how to hang the roll and 
 equipment on them, and are then taken to the armory floor for drill; 
 here they will be taught how to wear the uniform, how to salute, etc. 
 
50 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 After this drill, they are shown how to place their uniform, etc., in 
 their lockers in a neat and uniform manner. 
 Second Dri!ll. 
 
 The squad will be assembled in prbper uniform and inspected 
 to see that the men are wearing the uniform properly, that their 
 leggings are on straight, and that every button is in place and 
 buttoned, etc. Hat-cofds must be habitually worn and sewed to 
 the hat. Hats must be worn straight and properly creased. After 
 this inspection, proceed with the drill. (Paiagrkphs 1 to 7 and 50 
 to 70, inclusive.) 
 
 In teaching the halt, it will be found that better results will be 
 gotten if the pifeparatory command, "Squad," is given when the 
 left foot strikes the ground; give the command "«Halt'' when this 
 foot s'trikes the ground again. Men advance and plant the right foot 
 and halt. In teaching rebruits— and, in fact, in company drill— 
 you will always get better results if you accustom the men to re- 
 ceiving the prepariatory command when the left foot strikes the 
 ground; give the command of execution when this foot strikes the 
 ground again. The movement will theii be executed in a prompt 
 and uniform manner. At least half of the poor drills are due to the 
 manner in which the instructor gives his commandsl If you have 
 a unifohn system in giving commands and the men become accus- 
 tomed to it, you will always get bettel resVilts than by giving the 
 commands in any old manner. 
 
 Don't allow men to drill in shirts; make them drill in blouses. 
 DrilUng in shirts in the armory makes men slouchy and careless. 
 Under no circumstances sihould men be allowed to drill in civilian 
 clothes^. Now, don't slight this drill; make your instruction thor- 
 ough, and do not advance men to the thiid drill until they are rea- 
 sonably proficient in the second, and so on. You will save time 
 in the ejnd. 
 
 Recruits should be required to drill at least twice a week, three 
 times if possible, and every night for the fii*st two weeks would be 
 better. New men are enthusiastic and anxious to learn; make the 
 most of this while it lasts'. If recruits only drill once a week, they 
 advance so slowly that they soon become discouraged and lose 
 interest in the drill and in their organization. It is better to have 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 51 
 
 one instructor for each batch o-f recruits. If you change instructors 
 frequently, your recruits will not learn nearly so fast. The first 
 lecture will be delivered to the men after this drill. 
 Third Drill. 
 
 Men will be assembled in proper uniform and inspected as in 
 the second drill. Review s'aluting and movements in second diill, 
 then proceed with third drill. (Paragraphs 71 to 73, inclusive.) 
 
 In marching by the right flank, be careful to give the prepara- 
 toiy command when the light foot strikeis the giound and the com- 
 mand of execution when the right foot strikes the ground again. 
 The men advance and plant the left foot, turn to the right, and step 
 off in the new direction with the right foot. 
 
 If marching by the left flanlc, give the commands on the left 
 foot. The men advance and plant the right foot, turn to the left, 
 and step off in the new direction with the left foot. 
 
 »When marching to the reai, give the preparatory command 
 when the right foot st/ikes the ground and the command of execu- 
 tion when the right foot strikes the ground again. Men advance 
 and plant the left foot, face about to the right, and step off promptly 
 with the left foot. 
 
 Give your commands in this manner: "By the right flank, 
 March; One, two." "By the left flank, March; One, two." "To 
 the rear, March; One, two, three." If this method is followed, 
 men can be taught to execute these movements without hesitating 
 or losing the cadence — a common error. When the men are well 
 drilled, the counts after the commands would, of course^ be omitted. 
 
 You must insist upon your men standing absolutely still in ranks. 
 They must keep their head and eye^ straight to the front, their 
 hands down, and the thumb along the seam of the breeches. Insist 
 upon these things. They all go for discipline and smartness. When 
 you correct a man in the rear rank, don't allow half of the front rank 
 to turn around to see what you are doing. Make them stand a till 
 in ranks. There is only one way to play this game, and that is 
 the right w^ay. 
 
 The second lecture will be delivered to the men after this drill. 
 Fourth Drill. 
 
 Men will be assembled in proper uniform and inspected, as in 
 
52 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 previous drills. They will be taught the names of the principal 
 parts of the rifle; not the intricate parts, but just the principal 
 parts', such as butt, barrel, bolt, sights, trigger guard, etc. They 
 should be given a short talk upon the necessity of keeping the rifle 
 clean and in a serviceable condition at all times and they should be 
 given some idea of how this is done. Don't give them too much, or 
 they will not get any of it. Then proceed with the drill. (Paia- 
 graphs 74 to 84, inclusive.) The instructor should carefully study 
 thesle paragriaphs before going out to drill, no matter how well he 
 thinks he knows the drill. 
 
 Impress upon the men the fact that in most m^ovements in the 
 manual of arms there is a right angle somewhere; see that they get 
 it. For example, in port arms and right shoulder arms, the right 
 arm forms a right angle at the elbow. In port arms a common 
 error is to have the rifle cross opposite the left shoulder, instead of 
 opposite the junction of the neck with the shoulder. Watch this. 
 
 In coming to the port or right shoulder, the rifle should be 
 thrown up smaitly and grasped with both hands simultaneously or 
 nearly so. The common error is to raise the piece with the right 
 arm, instead of throwing it up as prescribed. 
 
 In coming to the order, the piece must be lowered gently to the 
 ground, and not jammed down. There should be scarcely any noise 
 made. The rifle is carried to the right side smartly and then low- 
 ered gently to the ground. This does not interfere with carrying 
 the left hand to the side smartly. 
 
 In executiag the manual, the men must be impressed with the 
 fact that they must not move their heads. In coming up to the 
 port and right shoulder, the rifle mus^t be grasped and held firmly 
 with both hands. A common error is to allow the mu^ale to dip 
 down and to the left, sometimes striking the man on the left. 
 
 Make your men stand still in ranks. 
 
 The third lecture will be dehvered to the men after this drill. 
 FiB-TH DriIl. 
 
 Men wiU be assembled in proper uniform and inspected, as in 
 previous drills. Review previous drills. Question men in regard 
 to names of parts of the lifle. (Paragraphs 85 to 100, inclusive.) 
 
 In parade rest the common error is to place the right foot in 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 53 
 
 rear of the left; this is wrong; the right foot is diawn 6 inches 
 straight to the rear. In coming to the parade rest, the piece must 
 be turned on its toe, not on the heel. In order to do this, incline the 
 rifle slightly forward when coming to parade rest. In resuming the 
 order, the piece is also turned on its toe. 
 
 Men should be taught how to carry the piece at the balance. 
 This form of trail arms should be habitually used in extended-order 
 diill. 
 
 In fixing and unfixing bayonet,, the muzzle of the rifle must be 
 kept in place in front and center of body. Raipe the left elbow to 
 get room for drawing or returning the bayonet. The common 
 error made is to extend the left arm to its full lejigth. Remember, 
 in fixing and unfixing bayonet you come to a complete parade rest 
 first. The common error made is to shght this movement; men 
 do not come to the complete parade rest before fixing and unfixing 
 bayonet. 
 
 In coming to the position of charge bayonet, the most common 
 mistakes are: weight of body not equally supported by both legs; 
 one knee bent more than the other; point of bayonet too high; 
 rifle not far enough to the front. Most men get the right hand 
 opposite the right hip; this is wrong; the right hand must be well 
 to the frjont and on a line with the left hip. Study the illustration 
 in the '^ Manual of the Bayonet." 
 
 A very snappy way of executing inspection arms is as follows 
 and ddes away with the ragged manned in which this movement is 
 usually executed: (1) Port (2) Arms. (3) In.spection [place the 
 right hand on the bolt handle] (4) Arms [open the bolt smartly]. 
 (5) Port [close the bolt cimartly] (6) Arms [pull the trigger]. After 
 a few drills, your company will be able to do this like one man, and 
 it is a very pretty and effective movement. It is valuable, because 
 it teaches men precision and smartness; the other way teaches 
 them to be careless, as it is next to impossible to execute this move- 
 ment together. 
 
 Make your men stand still in ranks and keep their hands down 
 and their heads still. 
 
 The fourth lecture will be delivered to the men after this drill. 
 
54 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Sixth Dri^l. 
 
 Men will be assembled in propQi' uniform and inspected, as in 
 previous drilL-. 
 
 This drill will be entirely devoted to a review of aU previous 
 drills. Be careful to correct every mistake that is made. Stop the 
 drill and make the correction at once. Remember, simply giving 
 commands is not drilling men. You must correct every mistake. 
 I have seen National Guard officers and non-commissioned officers 
 stand in the center of the armory floor and give commands to a 
 squad or company drilling and never correct a single mistake. 
 They thought that this was drill, but it was not. I know of nothing 
 that will ruin a conmaand quicker than this practice.. 
 
 It is better to be able to do four things correctly than it is to 
 do twelve and none of them right. Don^t delude yourself into the 
 belief that you will become efficient by imparting superficial in- 
 struction to your men. You may think that perfection can be ob- 
 tained by repetition, but you will not attain it unless your instruc- 
 tion is thorough, careful, and precise. Go slow at first, and you will 
 be able to go faster later on; go too fast at first, and you will never 
 advance beyond mediocrity and will never be really efficient. 
 
 Remember, close order is for discipline, and is useless for this 
 purpose unless exact; extended-order drill is to teach your men to 
 maneuver, and is worthless unless snappy. Battle exercises must 
 be carefully thought out and must always teach a military lesson. 
 
 The fifth lecture will be read to the men after this drilK 
 General Remarks on Squad Drill. 
 
 Squad diill is geneially neglected in the National Guard be- 
 cause its importance is not understood. 
 
 The squad is the unit upon which the entiie system of close- 
 and extended-order drill is based. It follows, therefore, that your 
 squad drill must be thorough and exact; you can do nothing unlese 
 this is done. 
 
 You can take sixteen squads that nevei had a company drill, 
 but know sjquad diill thoroughly, and teach them company drill in 
 three houis; but you could not teach these same men company dril 1 
 in threjB months if they did not know squad drill. Do you doubt 
 this? Wejl, let ussiee. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). ' 55 
 
 Your company is in line. Give squads right, or left, or right 
 about — ^what is it but squad drill and dressing on the guide? Take 
 right or left front into Une, for instance. The corporal of the first 
 squad commands "Forward," and takes his squad forwaid until the 
 captain commands ''Halt." All the other squad-leaders command 
 "Right obUque," then Forward, march," and "Squad halt" when 
 they arrive on the new line — ^what is this but squad drill? On right 
 into line is similar. In extended-order drill it is the same thing : 
 the corporal commands ''Follow me," and leads his squad to its 
 place, when he deploys it. As far as the squads are concerned, it is 
 all squad drill, so you see the men mus't know squad drill thoioughly. 
 
 Every minute silent on aquad drill will save you twenty latei 
 on when learning company diill. You will find that this statement 
 is not overdrawn. 
 
 You must have intelligent men for corporals or squad-leadeis. 
 Don't waste time o;n any man who cannot thinK quickly. If your 
 corporals are efficient, your squads will be efficient, and it follows 
 naturally that you will have an efficient company. 
 
 Do your heutenants know squad diill thoroughly? Put them 
 in the ranks, give them a squad, and see. I have found this method 
 excellent. You can't teach drill until you know it youi-s'elf, and 
 the best place to learn drill is in the ranks. I do not mean to let 
 them drill a squad separately, although it is a good thing to let 
 them do this also; but what I mean is, have them act as corpoial 
 in the ranks in company drill. 
 
 Squad drill should always be under arms. 
 
 Until your men know the School of the Soldier and the Manual 
 of Arms they are not ready for squad drill. 
 
 Don't hurry. The moie haste the less speed. 
 
 Remember, when anything happens to the corporal the private 
 who has the most seivice immediately assumes chaige. This rule is 
 general. If the captain wants any other man to take charge of the 
 squad, he will designate him; otherwise the senior private assumes 
 charge without waiting for express orders to do so. 
 
 Remember, when any body of armed men is formed, the first 
 thing that is done after the command "Fall in" is given is to inspect 
 the pieces to see if any are loaded. Remember, the last thing that 
 
56 COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 
 
 is done before dismissing any body of armed men is to inspect the 
 pieces'. This rule is general, and this inspection must never be 
 omitted. 
 
 Teach the rear-rank men to get theii distance by raising the 
 rifle, muzzle against back of fiont-rank men and comb of the atock 
 3 inches in front of the belt buckle of reai-rank men. From the 
 muzzle of the rifle to the comb of the stock is about 37 inches. 
 
 In dressing, watch the left elbow. The common error is to let 
 it incline to the rear, instead of keeping it parallel to your front. 
 
 Don't neglect teaching taking intervals and distances; it teaches 
 a mauxwhere he belongs in the squad better than any other drill. 
 
 Make the rear-rank men cover the front-rank men accurately. 
 A common error is not to do this. 
 
 Seventh Drill. 
 
 Men will be assembled in proper uniform, under arms, and in- 
 spected, as in previous drills. (Paragraphs 101 to 115, inclusive.) 
 
 The instructor should read carefully the Drill Regulations ex- 
 plaining how arms are stacked, no matter how well he knows it. 
 
 The sixth lecture \^ ill be read to the men after this drill. 
 Eighth Drill. 
 
 Men will be assembled in proper uniform, under arms, andi in- 
 spected, as in previous drills. (Paragraphs 116 to 122, inclusive.) 
 
 COMMON MISTAKES. 
 
 In turning on the fixed pivot, pivot-man does not turn at once; 
 usually waits for other men to come around. He must turn 90 de- 
 grees at once as soon as the command "March" is given, without ref- 
 erence to movements of any other man. 
 
 Rear-rank men usually execute movements the same as front- 
 rank men; this is wrong. The movements of the rear rank are en- 
 tirely different from those of the front rank. Study the book. 
 
 No. 3 or No. 2, as the case may be, is follow^ed in column by 
 Nos. 2 and 1 or 3 and 4; this is rarely done correctly. 
 
 Squad right about is simply squad right twice. The second 
 change is not made until the man on the marching flank gets up on 
 the line, then the pivot turns again. Usually the pivot-man does 
 not wait, but turns too soon. In turning on the moving pivot, the 
 pivot-man usually marks time in his place for two or three steps,. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 57 
 
 . instead of immediately marching in the new direction at half-step. 
 The rear rank in this case must turn on the same ground and in the 
 ■ same manner as the front rank. 
 
 Remember, in halting from oblique march men halt faced to the 
 front; they do not halt and then face, but halt faced to the front. 
 Give the command ''Half' when the left foot strikes the ground, and 
 men should have no difficulty in halting correctly faced to the front. 
 They advance and plant the right foot and the half face is made in 
 biinging up the left foot. 
 
 The seventh lecture will be read to the men after this drill. 
 Ninth Drill. 
 
 Men will be assembled in proper uniform, under arms, and in- 
 spected, as in previous drills. 
 
 Review of seventh and eighth drills. 
 
 Watch for and correct all mistakes. Watch for the very 
 common mistake of men commencing to come to the order before 
 the halt is completed. You can cori-ect this tendency if you teach 
 the men to halt and come to the order in five counts. For example : 
 ''Squad halt — one, two" (this completes the halt); "One, two, 
 three" (this for the Manual). Give the command "Halt" when the 
 left foot strikes the ground. They then advance and plant the right 
 foot — this is one; they then bring the left foot alongside of the right 
 — ^this is two; thej^ then come to the order — one, two, three. 
 
 The eighth lecture will be read to the men aftei this drill. 
 Tenth DriIl. 
 
 Men will be assembled in proper uniform, under arms, and in- 
 spected, as in previous drills. (Paragraphs 123 to 132, inclusive.) 
 
 Some time should be devoted to teaching the squad to follow 
 the corporal when he commands, "Follow me." Lead them about 
 the armory floor in every direction and without further commands 
 after this command has been given. 
 
 Note that in deploying as skirmishers in the squad the men 
 always get to their places on the run. This rule is general. The 
 captain may command, "As skirmishers. Guide right." The com- 
 pany will execute this movement in quick time and the squads will 
 move to their places in quick time; but when the corporal com- 
 
58 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 mands, "As skirmishers, March," the men habitually deploy on the 
 run. This is not usually done; insist upon it. 
 
 Note the deployment and assembly are made on the corporal. 
 
 The ninth lecture will be read to the men after this drill. 
 Eleventh Drill. 
 
 Men will be assembled in proper uniform, under arms, and in- 
 spected, as in previous drills. (Paragraphs 133 to 145, inclusive.) 
 
 Note that in the position of aim the right elbow is at the height 
 of the right shoulder. The common mistake made is to have the 
 elbow 5 or 6 inches below the shoulder; this will cause the piece to 
 be canted. Watch this and make the men keep the right elbow up 
 where it belongs. Note that in the position of aim the man first 
 makes a half right face and then carries the right foot about 1 foot 
 to the right; this will bring the right heel about 1 foot to the rear 
 and about 3 inches to the right of the left heel. Common mistakes 
 made are to place the right foot in rear of the left and to retain the 
 left foot in place; if this is done, it places the men in a constrained 
 position. You must insist that men make the complete half right 
 face before they move the right foot to the right. 
 Twelfth DriIl. 
 
 Men will be assembled in proper uniform, under arms, and in- 
 spected, as in previous drills. (Paragraphs 146 to 168, inclusive.) 
 Give careful instruction in Paragraphs 152 to 158, inclusive. 
 
 Teach men to fire from windows, doorways, from behind boxes 
 to i-epriesent intrenchments, from behind chairs to lepresent sandbags 
 and loop-holes, etc. If you can secure six or seven gunny-sacks 
 filled with earth, so much the better for this instruction. Make this 
 instruction thorough, and be careful that each man understands 
 exactly what you are trying to teach him. 
 
 Read the tenth lecture to the men after this diill. 
 Thirteenth Dri^ll. 
 
 General review of all previous drills. Time, two hours. 
 
 Watch for and correct all mistakes. 
 
 If the pieceding drills have been thorough and your men are 
 reasonably intelligent, they will now be able to take their places in 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 59 
 
 the ranks of the company without getting lost or "balling up" the 
 formation. 
 
 This completes the lecruit instruction. 
 
 In some cases it may be found necessary to repeat one or more 
 of the drills for the benefit of the men who learn slowly. However, 
 don't hold the entire squad back on account of one or two men, as it 
 kills their interest. 
 
 General Remarks on the Preceding Drills. 
 
 The instructor should always read over the drill in the Drill 
 Regulations before he goes out to drill the squad. This is very 
 necessary. 
 
 Don't detail a man to drill recruits who cannot talk and explain 
 things clearly. Don't detail a man who is not well drilled himself. 
 
 Don't allow the instructor to waste time at rest. If you want 
 to rest the men, change the movement or review previous drills. 
 Your time is very short; make the most of it. 
 
 Don't be afraid of giving the men a hard drill; recruits joining 
 the Guard expect it, and are disappointed and lose interest if the 
 drills are not sharp and snappy. 
 
 No man should be allowed to take his place in the ranks of the 
 company until he has had the complete recruit course. Don't 
 violate this rule; you will never get anywherje if you do, and your 
 company can never become eflficient. You can't teach men these 
 things in the ranks of the company; they must be learned in the 
 squad. 
 
 The object of the lectures is to give the men some theory along 
 with their practical instruction and to impress upon them the fact 
 that there is more to their business than simply learning the move- 
 ments laid down in Part I. of the Infantry Drill Regulations. It 
 is not expected that every recruit will get every point brought 
 out in the lectures, but the officers and non-commissioned officers 
 will get these points thoroughly impressed upon their minds in 
 drilling recruits, and this will be an enormous gain in efficiency 
 in itself. 
 
 The company commander should have the cards on "Rules of 
 the Game," ** Sentinels' Outpost Orders," and "Instructions for 
 
60 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Patrols'' printed in convenient size to be carried in the pocket, on 
 heavy cardboard, and these cards should be issued to every man in 
 the company when the corresponding lecture is read. You will 
 find that you will impart an enormous amount of military informa- 
 tion to your men in this simple manner. You get them to thinking 
 and talking among themselves, and when you have attained this, 
 improvement is sure to follow and be rapid. 
 
 One word more. All National Guard troops are careless in 
 saluting. The salute is one of the most important aids to enforcing 
 discipline. Insist that your men salute properly and smartly, and 
 never overlook the slightest dereliction in this matter. If your 
 recruits are properly instructed in saluting, you should never have 
 any serious trouble in enforcing the salute. Offic^ers must, however 
 insist upon the salute being rendered at all times, and must be care- 
 ful to return properly the salute of enlisted men. Nothing is so de- 
 moralizing to a command as having officers negligent and careless 
 in returning the salutes of enlisted men. Officers must salute each 
 other; this is important also. A visiting officer invariably judges 
 the discipline of your command by the manner in which they salute > 
 and quite properly too, because I know of nothing that shows the 
 standard of discipUne in an organization more clearly than this. 
 
 See first part of this chapter in regard to time devoted to 
 teaching recruits bayonet exercise. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 61 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 COMPANY DRILL. 
 
 FiteiST Drill. 
 
 Paragraphs 159 to 175, inclusive. (Inspect the company, as 
 in recruit driU.) 
 
 The captain and heutenants should study carefully (before 
 commencing company drill) Paragraphs 159 to 175, inclusive. Now 
 I don't mean that they should read this part superficially; I mean 
 that they should read and study these paragraphs carefully before 
 attempting company drill. 
 
 The diagrams on page 46 should be memorized so that there 
 will never be any question in your mind as to where any man in the 
 company belongs. Remember, each man has a definite place in 
 line and in column; see that he stays there. The most common 
 error is to sprinkle men along in the line of file-closers, and generally 
 they do not know where they belong. 
 
 Your first company drill should be devoted to forming your 
 company properly and carefully explaining to each man exactly 
 where he belongs, both in line and in column of squads and column 
 of platoons. Don't attempt to maneuver in this fii^st drill. Devote 
 the entire hour to teaching officers and men where they belong and 
 how they get there. You will find that it will be time well spent. 
 , When the company is first formed, squads and platoons are 
 given a number. These designations are permanent, no matter 
 where the squad or platoon is or how it is facing; that is, the second 
 squad is always the second squad and the fourth platoon is always 
 the fourth platoon. Y"ou can maneuver your company so that you 
 can place the first and fourth platoons in the center of the company, 
 but they are always the first and fourth platoons and will be des- 
 ignated as such in commands. 
 
 Second Drill. 
 
 Paragraphs 176 to 186, inclusive. (Inspect the company as 
 [n recruit diill.) 
 
 Note that in company right the right-flank man is the pivot 
 
62 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 and that the guide steps back on the line. In company right turn 
 the guide is the pivot and initiates the turn. A common mistake is 
 to execute both movements in the same manneyr. Watch this. In 
 company right the right-flank man must turn ninety degrees to the 
 right at the command "March," and not wait for the man on his left. 
 Caxition the left flank of the company not to increasfe the cadence 
 or length of step; you will wait for them. 
 
 In right turn see that the guide turns at once at the command 
 * 'March" and takes up the half-step without waiting for anyone else. 
 The usual error is to turn to the right too slowly, and mark time 
 for the first two or three steps, and wait for the two or three men 
 on his left to get up on the line before he advances. 
 
 Note that in company right the rear rank of the first squad 
 executes the movement in a different manner from any of the other 
 squads. All the other men in the lear rank move straight to the 
 front foui paces before they obUque to the light. 
 
 Note that in right turn the rear rank executes the, movement on 
 the same giound as the front rank and in a similar manner. 
 
 Third Drill. 
 
 Repeat second drill. Watch carefully for mistakes and correct 
 each one. Never imder any circumstances fail to correct a mistake 
 as sbon as made. 
 
 Fourth Drill. 
 ' Paragraphs 187 to 193, inclusive. (Inspect the company as in 
 previous drills.) 
 
 Note* that the leader of each unit gives certain commands. 
 This means squad leaders if the company is in column of squads, 
 and platoon commanders if in column of platoons. Require your 
 squad and platoon commanders to give their commands so that 
 they can be distinctly heard by you, and see that the commands are 
 given promptly. 
 
 Note that the movement is executed at the command "March" 
 given by the captain. The leader of the first unit does not give the 
 command * 'March"; his unit executed the movement at the com- 
 mand "March" given by the captain. The leaders of all other units 
 give the commands "Right turn" and "March" when it is time for 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 63 
 
 their units to turn. The leading unit halts at the command "Com- 
 ' pany halt," given by the captain. Its leader then commands **Right 
 dress." The other units are halted by their leaders when they arrive 
 on the line. They also give the command ''Right dress." The 
 command "Front" is given by the captain after the last unit has 
 arrived on the Une and has dressed. His post in dressing the com- 
 pany is two pja'ces from the right or left flank, as the case may be. 
 
 Caution units in rear of the first not to try to catch up with 
 the first unless the command "Double time" has been given. If the 
 movement is executed while marching in double time, its execution 
 issimilai to the movement in quick time. 
 
 In the movement front into line from column of squads or 
 platoons, the previous remarks in regard to the movwnent on right 
 into line apply. 
 
 See that the leaders of subdivisions give their commands 
 promptly. The most common mistake made is that corporals fail 
 to give the commands "Halt" and "March." They usually give the 
 preparatory command, but fail to give the command of execution. 
 Another common error is that subdivisions do not wait for the com- 
 mands of their leaders. Insist that they make no movement until 
 they get the commands of their corporal or platoon commander. 
 
 Don't alloV the units in rear to catch up with the leading units. 
 The distance between squads must be maintained until they reach 
 the line. These movements are called "successive formations." 
 The units are supposed to arrive on the line in succession. 
 
 Another point: Don't allow leaders of subdivisions to give the 
 command for dressing until their units have completed the halt and 
 order arms. If they give the command "Dress" before these move- 
 ments are completed, you wiU always have a ragged execution. 
 
 These are all small points, but you must observe them if you 
 want precision and a snappy drill. Remember, if your close-order 
 drill is not precise and snappy, it is worthless, and will defeat the 
 object for which given— namely, to impart discipHne. 
 
 Paragraphs 194 to 197, inclusive, are not included in any of 
 the drills. These movements have Httle, if any, value and require 
 lots of practice beforte they can be executed without confusion. 
 The National Guard has not the time to waste on these movements. 
 
64 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 If it is ever necessary to use a column of twos, you can get this 
 formation by forming your company in line and then giving ''Right 
 face." 
 
 You can get a column of files by deploying as skirmis,hers and 
 then marching by the flank, and it takes no longer than forming 
 right by file from cblumn of squads. To assemble your company 
 afterwards!, give the command, ''Assemble on the first squad in 
 column of squads; March." You will then be back in column of 
 squads, and it takes no longer than the movement squads front 
 into line. 
 
 EXTENDED-ORDER DRILL. 
 General Remarks. 
 
 Officers and sergeants should read carefully and thorou^ghly 
 memorize Paragraphs 199 to 205, inclusive. Never go out for 
 extended-order drill without re-reading these paragraphs. 
 
 Remember, you have but three commands for deploying your 
 company— "Guide right, left, o: center"— and these are sufficient. 
 Your company can be deployed in any direction by these commands. 
 I will illustrate. 
 
 You are marching north and want to deploy to your front: 
 Give the command, "As skirmishers. Guide right or left." This will 
 throw your line to the right or left front. 
 
 You are marching north and want to deploy to the northeast 
 or northwest: "Column half right or half left; As skirmishers* 
 Guide left or right." 
 
 You are marching no rth and you want to deploy to the east or 
 west: "Squads right or left; As skirmishers, Guide right or left." 
 
 You are marching north and you want to deploy to your right 
 rear: "Squads right or left about; As skirmishers. Guide right 
 or left." 
 
 If you want to deploy in an oblique direction, give the com- 
 mand, "Column half right or half left," after wheeling about by 
 squads. 
 
 If you want to deploy on both sides of the road upon which 
 you are marching, give the commands, "As skirmishers'. Guide 
 center." (You are in column of squads.) The center squad de» 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 65 
 
 ploys on the road, the squads in front of the center squad move to 
 ' the right and deploy on the line, the sijuads to the rear of the center 
 squad move to the left front and deploy on the line. 
 
 If you want to deploy to the rear, give the command, "Squads 
 right or left about,'' and then execute the movement as above 
 explained. 
 
 Remember, the squads in reai of the center squad always go to 
 the left front. This rule is geneial. It does not matter whether 
 the right or left of the company is in front. 
 Remarks on Handling the Company After It Has Been Deployed. 
 
 Youi company is in line, deployed, facing north, and you want 
 to open fire to your rear: About face, Fire at will. 
 
 Your company is in line, deployed, facing north, and you want 
 to change front to the east: Company right, or Company right, 
 Double time, March. Same to change front to the west. To change 
 front to the right or left rear: About face. Company right or left. 
 
 After a little practice, you should sbon be able to throw your 
 company in any direction promptly and without the shghtest 
 confusion. 
 
 Fifth Drill. 
 
 Paragraphs 206 to 211, inclusive. 
 
 The Drill Regulations do not provide for assembling by squads, 
 but it is not contrary to their spirit to do so, and I have found that 
 it is a very good exercise to impress upon men the fact that the 
 squad is the unit, and they mustlook to their corporal for commands 
 and direction. This can be done by the captain giving the com- 
 mand: L. Assemble by squad, 2. March. At the preparatory 
 command the corporals command, "Squad assemble." The move- 
 ment is completed at the command "March," given by the captain. 
 Squad-leaders do not repeat the command "March" unless it is 
 necessary. 
 
 To deploy the company again, the captain commands: 1. As 
 skirmishers, 2. March. Corporals repeat the preparatory com- 
 mand, but do not repeat "March" unless necessary. Remember, 
 squads deploy and assbmble on the corporal. 
 
 To assemble the company from a Une of squads, command: 
 1. Assemble to the right, 2. March. The corporal of the first squad 
 
66 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 commands, "Stand fast"; the corporals of the other squads com- 
 mand, "By the right flank." The movement is completed at the 
 command "March," given by the captain. Each co!pporal halts his 
 squad when in place and commands, "Left face." It is not usual 
 to give the command for dressing when drilling in extended order. 
 
 Being in line, to fotm skirmish-line: 1. As skirmishers, Guide 
 right, 2. March. The corporal of the first or right squad com- 
 mands, "As skirmishers"; the corporals of all the other squads com- 
 mand, "By the left flank." The movement is completed as the com- 
 mand "March," given by the captain. Each corporal commands 
 "As cskii-mishers, March," when his squad is where it should be 
 deployed. It is not necessary to command "Halt" or "Right face'^ 
 before this command. The men deploy on the corporal and dress 
 without command. In deploying on the center, the movement is 
 executed in a similar marmer. Squads to the right of the base squad 
 move to the right, those to the left move to the left. 
 
 Being in column, to deploy as skirmishers: 1. As skirmishers, 
 2. Guide right or left. The corporal of the leading squad commands, 
 "As skirmishers"; all the other corporals command, "Follow me." 
 " The movement is completed at the command "March," given by the 
 captain. Corporals command, "As skirmishers, March," when about 
 two paces in rear of their place in the line. The men halt on the line 
 without command and dress. If this movement is executed on the 
 center squad, corporals in advance of the center lead their squads to 
 the right rear and then place them on the line. Corporals in rear 
 of the center squad lead their squads to the left front and place them 
 on the line as above explained. 
 
 If marching in column of files or twos, to form skirmishers to 
 the front : 1 . As skirmishers, 2. Guide right or left. Each corporal , 
 except the corporal of the leading squad, cautions, "Left oblique" or 
 "Right oblique," if the movement is guide left. This caution of the 
 corporal's is verly necessary and will prevent much confusion. 
 
 Being in skirmish-Une, to assemble: 1. Assemble to the right, 
 2. March. The corporal of the first squad commands, "Squad 
 assemble"; the other corporals caution, "By thenght flank." The 
 movement is executed at the command "March," given by the 
 captain. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 67 
 
 To increase intervals: 1. As skirmishers, At five-pace inter- 
 vals, 2. Guide right, 3. March. 
 
 To decrease intervals: 1. As skirmishers. At two-pace inter- 
 vals, 2. Guide left, 3. March. 
 
 Intervals can be in ci eased or deci eased on the centei squad by 
 commanding ^'Guide center" instead of "right" or "left." 
 
 In executing these movements, men move by the flank if at a 
 halt, or by the oblique if marching. 
 
 Corporals should supervipe their squadd. The corporal of the 
 baae squad is the guide. Remember, the guide in extended order 
 is habitually center. It does not, however, become center until any 
 deployment is completed. It is a very wise precaution for sergeants 
 in the Une of file-closers to observe the movement and caution, ''Guide 
 center" when the movement is completed. Men on the hne rarely 
 know when the guide becomes center from right oi left unless this 
 is done. This simple piecaution will prevent much confusion. 
 
 Some officers may think that I have gone into detail imneces- 
 saiily in explaining these movements, but in answer I will state 
 that I have found it absolutely necessary in training new troops 
 and especially newly-appointed oflScers. Of course, they would all 
 work these points out themselves in time, but remember, in the 
 Volunteers and in the National Guard our time is limited. Why 
 make an officer work these things olit when he can be shown in 
 five minutes? 
 
 Sixth Drill. 
 
 Paragraphs 212 to 220, inclusive. 
 
 Don^t forget your combat patrols. Never have a drill ox prac- 
 tice an attack without sending out youi right- and left-flank combat 
 patrols. In action they should be out at least 500 yards; for drill 
 they can be closer in, but be careful to explain each time why they 
 are so close to tne Une. 
 
 What is a combat patrol? A combat patrol is a patrol that is 
 always sent out from a deployed line or an advancing column to 
 protect your command from surprise or fire on the flank. For a 
 company a squad of four men is usually sufficient, although circum- 
 stances might arise when it would be necessary to have a stronger 
 force. If the combat patrol encounters the enemy or is attacked, 
 
68 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 it must lesist to the last man until the line or column has had time 
 to prepare for the unexpected attack. 
 
 Remember, the squad column is never used to provide security 
 against artillery fire. This formation is more vulnerable to aitillery 
 fire than the deployed line. It is useful only when passing through 
 broken ground or undeibiush or trees. 
 
 The platoon column offers more security from aitillery fiie, 
 but to secuie the best results the heads of the columns must not be 
 on the same line. You can secure this formation by ordering 
 platoons forward at intervals,. There should be at least 100 yai^ds 
 distance between the heads of the columns^. I am not speaking of 
 intervals, remember. The interval between platoon columns will 
 be governed by the interval that you had between skirmisjhers 
 before you ordered platoon column. 
 
 Seventh Drill. 
 
 Paragraphs 221 to 224, inclusive. 
 
 The captain should carefully study Paragraphs 225 to 257, in- 
 clusive, and Paragraphs 29)0 to 236, inclusive. 
 
 The Regulations say: "A captain uses his platoons in attack 
 like a major usps his companies; due allowance being made for 
 their difference in strength." 
 
 In teaching the different methods of advancing by rushes, it 
 is better to first teach the movements at a walk, first carefuUy ex- 
 plaining to the company just what you arfe trying to do. When the 
 movements are well underb'tood, execute the movements in double 
 time and finally at the run, which is the way they should be executed 
 in action. 
 
 General Remarks on the Preceding Drills. 
 
 If the course of drills outlined above has been carefully fol- 
 lowed and the instruction has been thorough, your company should 
 now be ready to take up training for combat. 
 
 It may be found necessary to review spme of the drills before 
 passing to the next one, but this will depend upon your ability as 
 an instructor and the intelligence of your men. 
 
 Let me cautioii you again to be thorough in whatever you do. 
 Do not advance to the next lesson until the previous one is well un- 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 69 
 
 dei stood. You will save time in the end and have a well-trained 
 company in addition. 
 
 The fault of all National Guard troops is to attempt to go too 
 fast, and the instruction given is rarely systematic or tho)rough. 
 This is a great mistake. It is bettei to be able to do four things 
 well than to be able to do twelve things and none of them cor- 
 rectly. If you can do four things well, you will in time learn the 
 others; but if you are not able to do anything right, there is very 
 little hope for you. 
 
 This book is not a treatise on tactics or strategy. It prescribes 
 a course of training for the recruit and for the company. If the 
 things laid down herein are well learned, you are ready for higher 
 training; but if your recruits aife not thoroughly trained and you 
 cannot handle your company, it is folly to attempt anything higher. 
 
 The amount of training that you can give your company in 
 battle tactics depends in a great measlire upon the time and ground 
 available for the purpose and cannot be prescribed or foreseen. 
 
 The clpurse outlined in this book, with your target practice, 
 both gallery and range practice, and instruction in bayonet exercise 
 and combat, it is believed, will keep you pretty busy during the 
 fall and winter and, if followed systematically, should prepare you 
 for your summer camp maneuvers. The average company in the 
 Guard fails to get the most benefit from summer camps and ma- 
 neuvers becausle it has to learn many things that should have been 
 learned in the armory beforehand. 
 
 Every soldier in your command should receive at least four 
 hours' instrucjtion in fiist aid during the first year of his service. 
 
 Your gaUery and range practice are usually prescribed by State 
 Regulations. In the absenc^te of these, follow the course laid down 
 in the ''Firing Manual, U. S. Army," 1913; but here, again, make 
 your instruction systematic and thorough. The following course 
 is suggested : 
 
 Preparatory Training for Target Practice. 
 
 Four drills in sighting— threte with sighting-bar and one with 
 the I ifle in a rest. 
 
 Two drills in position and aiming elxercisles. Don't sHght 
 these; they aie very important. No man ca^n learn to shoot until 
 
70 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 he has learned to hold the lifle conectly. Insist upon accuracy in 
 these drills, and t^ch every filing position. 
 - Four drills in galleiy practice. 
 
 Each of the above drills should be for one hour. 
 
 If the instruction impaited has been thorough, your men will be 
 ready for range practice. The amount of range practice you will be 
 able to give your men will depend upon time, money, and circum- 
 stances^ and carmot be prespr^bed. However, give them all you 
 can, but don't slight your other instr^ictions; they are equally 
 important. 
 
 If you are so placed that you have to choose between drill and 
 target practice, devote your time to drill. More battles have been 
 won by maneuvering and discipline than have ever been won 
 by shooting. 
 
 Instruction in Bayonet Fencing and Combat. 
 
 Your instruction in bayonet exercise, to be of any value, must 
 be thorough. The men must be taught correctly each movement. 
 It is necesskry to pay particular attention to position guard; this 
 is usually neglected. 
 
 The following course outHned lays down a preliminary course 
 in bayonet training and also an advanced course for those of yo\ir 
 men who are ready fo!r it. But here, again, don't go too fast. 
 
 Don't make your drills too long. On^-half hour is sufficient. 
 
 BAYONET EXERCISE. 
 
 (Time, one-half hour.) 
 First Drill. 
 
 Paragraphs 11 to 22, inclusive, "Manual of the Bayonet," 
 1913. 
 
 The usual mistake made in coming to the position of guard is 
 to have the weight of the body all on one le^ instead of equally 
 distributed bti both. Both knees must be bent equally. The body 
 must be erect upon the hipsl Mols^jt men either lean to the front or 
 to the rear. Both arte equally bad. Study the illustration in 
 the Manual. 
 
 Impress upon the men the fact that bayonet fetocing is like 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 71 
 
 bo!xmg-^you must be evenly balanced on the feet and be able to 
 move in any direction quickly without it being necessary to shift 
 the weight of the body from one leg to the other. 
 Second Drill. 
 Paragraphs 23 to 28, inclusive. 
 Study the illustrations in the Manual. 
 
 Require the meii to make the movements with life and put 
 force into their thrusts and lunges. They must be made with force 
 and life; otherwise they are of no use whatever. 
 Thi!rd Drill. 
 Paragraphs 29 to 36, inclusive. 
 
 Fourth Drill. 
 Review of first, second, and third drills. Be careful to correct 
 all mistakes. 
 
 Fkfth Drill. 
 
 Paragraphs 37 to 42, inclusive. 
 
 SitxTH DriIll. 
 Paragraph 43 only. Invent combinationsj. 
 
 Seventh, Eighth, Ninth, Tenth, and Eleventh Drills. 
 General review of all drills and combined movements. 
 
 General Remarks. 
 
 Paragraphs 46 to 114, "Manual o'f the Baygnet," should be 
 studied, and the article on bayonet fighting, repubhshed from the 
 United States Infantry Journal^ should be carefully read by officers 
 and sergeants before commencing bayonet exerci^. This will give 
 your instructors a better idea of how to direct bayonet training 
 and impriBss upon them the necessity for this very important 
 instruction. 
 
 The above schedule, if carefully fo^owed, will give you an ele- 
 mentary coursle in bayonet training, and the article in Chapter V. 
 will give you an advanced course, should one be desjired. 
 
 Study the illustration^, carefully and they will give you a better 
 idea of the positions and movements than you can get frbm the 
 text alone. 
 
72 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 PRACTICAL SUGGESTIONS FOR TRAINING A COMPANY 
 OF INFANTRY IN BAYONET FIGHTING. 
 
 Republished (by permission) from U.S. Infantry Journal, 1914. 
 
 "It is impossible to shoot an enemy out of a poisition.,7-*-Para- 
 graph 251, Field Service Regulations, 1913. 
 
 " Confidence in their ability to use the bayonet gives the as- 
 saulting troops the "promise of success."-^ Para^mpA^^'i, Infantry 
 Drill Regulations, 1911. 
 
 "Only the offensive wins." — Paragraph 51 U Infantry Drill 
 Regulations, 1911. 
 
 "Fire action (in night attacks) should be avoided in offens|ive 
 operations. In general, pieces should not be loaded. Men must 
 be trained to rely upon the bayonet and to use it aggress^ively."— 
 Paragraph 561, Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911. 
 
 "A force which makes a vigorous bayonet charge in the dark 
 will often throw a much larger foice into disorder." — Paragraph 564 y 
 Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911, 
 
 At Cerro Benego, on June 13, 1862, two companies of French 
 infantry, numbering 140 men, charging at night with the bayonet, 
 drove from their position a division of 6,000 Mexicans,^ inflicting a 
 loss of 250 kiUed and wounded, and made 200 prisoners, captured 
 3 mountain guns and a number of flags; The French in this 
 engagement lost 34 men. 
 
 How many ofl&cers of infantry appreciate the value and im- 
 portance of the paragraphs quoted above and are familiar with the 
 remarkable sjuccess of the 140 French infantrymen trained to use 
 the bayonet in their fight at Cerro Benego? 
 
 Exactly the same thing might happen to-day on a dark night 
 under similar circumstances'. And yet there are still some who 
 believe that the bayonet is an obsolete weapon. 
 
 In every battle of the army of General Okus, from Nanshan to 
 Mukden, in the Russb- Japanese Wax, a part, at least, of every posi- 
 tion was carried by assault, and in the army of Kuroki the bayonet 
 is reported to have been resorted to more -extensively than in the 
 army of General Okus. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY) , 73 
 
 It is reported that in the recent Balkan troubles the Bulgars, 
 and later the Greeks, made good use of the bayonet. 
 
 At the annual inspection of the 21st Infantry at Vancouver 
 Barracks, in 1913, the officers of the regiment were thoroughly sat- 
 isfied with the instruction which had been given and with the results 
 obtained, with the exception of bayonet fighting. It is safe to as- 
 sume that the showing made by the regiment in that respect was 
 equal, if not superior, to that usually made in this subject by any 
 infantry regiment; but it was so far behind the showing made in all 
 other subjects that it was thought best to devote special attention 
 to this subject during the winter instruction from November to 
 March, 1913-14. 
 
 It was decided to detail one lieutenant or sergeant from each 
 company to take a special course in this subject, for the purpose of 
 producing at least one competent instructor in each company and 
 in order to make the instruction imparted in the regiment uniform. 
 
 General Order No. 13, 21st Infantry, October 15, 1913, con- 
 tains this paragraph : 
 
 ^'3. During the month of November one oflScer or sergeant 
 from each company will report to Captain Cromwell Stacey, 21st 
 Infantry, from 9:45 to 10:45 a. m. daily, except Satul-days and 
 Sundays, to be trained as instructors in bayonet fencing." 
 
 Pursuant to the above order, one sergeant reported from each 
 company. It was found impracticable to detail lieutenants, on 
 account of shortage of officers, other duties, etc. 
 
 The sergeants detailed were excused from all duty that would 
 in any way conflict with the instruction, because it was desired to 
 have every man present at each lesson. Great care was taken not 
 to tire the men at first. Instruction was sharp while it lasted, and 
 the rests were frequent, but short. I have found that men get 
 diggusted with too much rest, the same as they do if the drill is too 
 long without rests. 
 
 Men were encouraged to ask questions and to find out why. 
 This privilege was not abused. It must be remembered that all of 
 these men were selected sergeants and exceptionally good men. 
 
 It may be remarked that it will be useless to waste time on any 
 man who is not mentally alert and physica% sound, strong, and 
 
74 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 quick. It is also useless to select a man for instructor who is not a 
 very close observer, because, while he may know the movements 
 thoroughly himself, he may not be able to see at a glance whether a 
 man has the correct position. I have seen many officers and non- 
 commissioned officers who would have to make a minute inspection 
 of every man before they could tell whether his position was correct 
 or not. Such men, no matter how good they may be in other 
 respects, are totally unfit for instructors. 
 
 An instructor should be able to cast a glance over his squad or 
 company and see instantly whether each man has the correct 
 position. 
 
 Instructors must be able to talk. Many good men know a 
 subject, but are totally incapable of imparting their knowledge 
 to others. 
 
 An instructor should be patient. Many men try as hard as 
 they can and yet are not able to comprehend movements at once. 
 Such men must not be growled at or discouraged: They are the 
 very ones who need instruction the most. 
 
 It was impressed upon the sergeants at every opportunity that 
 the bayonet instruction was in no sense a calisthenic drill. The 
 object of bayonet instruction was to teach a man to kill his opponent 
 in personal combat in the shortest possible time. 
 
 In teaching the thrusts, Ixmges, and throw point, men were 
 impressed with the fact that they had to put force behind the 
 movement in order to kill their man. If they did not execute their 
 movements correctly at drill, they would not do them properly when 
 they were required. They must form the habit of executing each 
 movement correctly; then, and not till then, could they feel safe be- 
 hind their point. They were also impressed with the fact that their 
 opponent would, in all human probability, be as badly scared as 
 they were, and if they would only keep cool and use their heads, 
 they would have no difficulty in defeating him. 
 
 Bayonet instruction must be systematic. Proper instruction 
 in bayonet fighting will never be obtained by giving two or three 
 hours' instruction in the subject a month. Squads or platoons 
 should be placed at this work and given not less than twenty hours' 
 consecutive instruction — «ay twenty lessons. Most instructors 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 75 
 
 make the mistake of placing the plastrons and masks on the men 
 and starting them in on combat before they know the rudiments of 
 fencing. This is a vital defect, as it is very difficult later to eradi- 
 cate faults in position and execution acquired in this manner. 
 
 No man should ever be allowed to engage in combat until he 
 has had at least fifteen hours' instruction in fencing, and this, it 
 must be remembered, after he has received the usual amount of 
 instruction usually given to a recruit in this subject. 
 
 There is a pernicious custom in the Army of not giving a recruit 
 any instruction in bayonet exercise until he is proficient in the 
 Manual of Arms. Why? Learning the Manual of Arms, the load- 
 ings, firings, and marching, have no connection with bayonet ex- 
 ercise. There is no reason why a recruit should not receive some 
 instruction in bayonet exercise the first day that he has a rifle 
 placed in his hands. In my company, in recruit instruction, I 
 always devote part of each day's drill to bayonet exercise. One- 
 half hour is sufficient, but that does not mean twenty-five minutes' 
 rest and five minutes' instruction. Before good results can be ob- 
 tained, you must impress upon the men that this instruction is 
 important — very important — and ranks next to instruction in rifle 
 practice. 
 
 Pointing and aiming drill prepares a man for range practice, 
 but he is not a competent rifleman until he has had that practice. 
 The bayonet exercises taught on the drill-grounds hold the same 
 relation to bayonet fighting that pointing and aiming drill does to 
 range practice. It follows, therefore, that a man is not a com- 
 petent bayonet fighter until this instruction has been supplemented 
 by thorough instruction in bayonet fencing and combat. It is also 
 impossible to make a competent bayonet fencer by giving him 
 instruction in bayonet exercise on the drill-ground alone. He must 
 cross bayonets with an opponent before he can make use of the 
 movements taught. 
 
 The movements laid down in the Manual are good, but there 
 are not enough of them. Paragraph 95, ''Manual of the Bayonet," 
 is elastic, but I believe that better results would be obtained if more 
 movements were included in the Manual itself. If you have an 
 instructor wha Jias a knowledge of foil fencing, he may be able to 
 
76 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 fill up the gaps; but he should also have a knowledge of broadsword 
 work, so that he will know what cuts a cavalryman will likely use. 
 
 I believe that the Manual is deficient in the following 
 movements: 
 
 No short thrusts are taught. Short thrusts are very useful 
 sometimes. 
 
 No parry is taught for a cavalry right low cut (right cut against 
 infantry). You cannot parry this cut with a parry high or a parry 
 right. The same thing applies to the left low cut, cavalry. 
 
 The throw point is an excellent attack if properly used, and it is 
 hard to parry if made with hfe. 
 
 Men are told that they can make a return from the low or high 
 parries, but they are not told how to do so. 
 
 The average man is not able to evolve a correct method from 
 his inner consciousness; and the result is that most men inva- 
 riably execute these movements incorrectly and ineffectually in 
 consequence. 
 
 Left point should be taught. It is much more effective than 
 changing front to the left and then thrusting or lunging. It is a 
 very nasty attack and is hard to parry. It is also extremely 
 effective in a melee. 
 
 Men are not taught to get upon the right rear of a lancer. 
 This is important. It is all right to gain the left rear of a man 
 armed with a saberj but you don't want to get there if he is armed 
 with the lance. 
 
 On the whole, this subject has never received the attention in 
 our service that it deserves. It is a tendency with our Army; 
 the cavalry has always slighted the saber in the same way. Bay- 
 onet fighting in the Army could be very much improved if this 
 subject were taken up seriously in each regiment; but frequently 
 there is no officer who has sufficient knowledge of the subject to be 
 a competent instructor. It is not sufficient to know the movements 
 laid down in the Manual. An instructor must be a fencer himself 
 before he can t^ach others. There are hundreds of men in the 
 infantry who know every movement laid down in the Manual and 
 can take each position correctly, and yet they cannot deliver an 
 attack properly or defend themselves by the parries that they can. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY), 77 
 
 execute. If anyone doubts this, let him take the best men he has 
 in his company in bayonet drill (as learned on the drillrground), 
 put plastrons and masks on them, and let them engage in combat. 
 Watch the hammer-and-tongs way in which they go at it and watch 
 the hits that are made. Practically, every thrust and lunge goes home. 
 Also watch the manner in which they wrestle with their rifles — 
 swaying back and forth, trying to do they know not what; bayonet 
 points clear up over their heads instead of on a iine with their 
 chests, etc. It undoubtedly looks very fine to a person who is not 
 a fencer, but any man who can use a foil or broadsword can see at 
 a glance how gross it all is. If you can use a broadsword yourself, 
 put on the plastron and mask with your best drill-ground-trained 
 bayonet-man and see how helpLess he is against your attacks. Try 
 him with the foil, if you prefer. But if you can't fence yourself, 
 how are you going to tell whether his work is good or bad, and how 
 are you going to teach him? 
 
 A parallel case would be to place boxing-gloves on men who 
 don't know how to box; but it will take a boxer to see how rotten 
 the exhibition is. I have found that men who can box learn bayonet 
 fighting in about half the time it takes to teach the ordinary man. 
 Why? Because they already have the idea; they appreciate attacks 
 and parries; they know the necessity for quickness and good foot- 
 work; they know that the parries must be close and the attacks 
 made with force and reach; they know that the body must be 
 pHable and that anything like stiffness must be avoided. 
 
 I do not believe that this subject will ever receive the attention 
 that it deserves until a School for Bayonet Fencing is established 
 in connection with the School of Musketry, and that each regiment 
 be required to send two Ueutenants there for instruction. Sergeants 
 might be sent also. When they return to their regiments they can 
 organize classes, and in that manner the whole Army would receive 
 proper instruction. The course should include boxing, fencing 
 with foil and broadsword, fencing with bayonet, foil against bayonet, 
 bayonet against saber, and, if possible, bayonet against lance. 
 
 I see no reason why the cavalry School in Fencing (and they 
 need one quite as badly as we of the infantry do) should not be 
 
78 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 located in the same place. Cavalry should know how to attack a 
 man armed with the bayonet. 
 
 The course should be for ninety days, four hours a day, six 
 days per week. 
 
 Qualifications should be established in bayonet fencing. 
 
 Two grades: 1st, proficient; 2d, expert. 
 
 A cloth badge should be given and worn on the left sleeve of 
 the uniform. 
 
 A board of officers in each regiment should conduct examina- 
 tions and award badges. When you do this, the men will take an 
 interest in the work and will drill overtime to gain that badge. 
 
 Qualifications to last for one year. 
 
 An officer, once qualified, should retain his qualification per- 
 petually and should wear the badge. Officers should not compete 
 with enhsted men. 
 
 Graduates of the School of Fencing should wear some dis- 
 tinctive badge. 
 
 This school could be organized by order and should not cost 
 much. The only item would be equipment and transportation. 
 
 One word more in regard to badges. One can not safely ignore 
 the very human quality of vanity, especially in the Army. Call 
 it esprit de corps if you will, but to obtain the best results it must be 
 fostered. If any man works hard and .has achieved proficiency in 
 any subject, he likes his comrades and the world in general to know 
 about it. 
 
 The following system was adhered to in training the sergeants 
 of the 21st Infantry as instructors. It is not claimed by the writer 
 that it is the best or the only scheme, but it was the result of much 
 thought and study on his part, covering a number of years, and it 
 is with the hope that it may add something to the efficiency of the 
 infantry that these notes are printed. They may be found useful 
 to any officer detailed or interested in this very important subject. 
 
 The course consisted of twenty lessons, one hour per day, five 
 days a week. As a matter of fact, more time than this was devoted 
 to the subject. We all became very much interested in the work, 
 and many times the instruction ran over the time allotted, due to 
 questions, explanations, etc. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY) . 79 
 
 The sergeants practiced some of the movements themselves 
 in barracks. 
 
 The following principles were impressed upon the men at every 
 opportunity : 
 
 Rely on your point. Don't cut unless you cannot use your 
 point. Remember that before commencing an attack with the 
 point your bayonet must be directed at the point to be attacked 
 before the thrust or lunge commences; otherwise your attack will 
 be wild, and you will get into the habit of making attacks with the 
 hope that perhaps they may go home. 
 
 Be careful to always take the correct position of guard. Have 
 the weight of the body equally distributed upon both legs. (A 
 common fault is to throw too much weight on the left leg.) 
 
 Never give your opponent any indication of your intention to 
 deliver an attack. (This is often done by partially closing the eyes, 
 setting the muscles, drawing back the rifle preparatory to thrusting 
 or lunging, looking at the point to be attacked, etc.) 
 
 No movement whatever should be slighted in any circumstance. 
 Make your parry complete before you attempt a return, and then 
 make your return with force and life. Don't make a return unless 
 there is a good opening and a fair chance of your attack going home. 
 Don't get into the habit of always making the same return from a 
 parry. 
 
 From the start, attack, attack^ attack. Throw your opponent 
 on the defensive. That is your best defense. If you keep him 
 engaged parrying your attacks, he will have precious little time to 
 devote to planning attacks on you. 
 
 Remember that whatever you do with the bayonet must be 
 done soon; you will soon be tired, and then it will be too late. 
 
 Keep cool. Never get excited or lose your head. 
 
 Never engage in a wrestling-match with your opponent. If he 
 tries to force your rifle to one side so that you will be uncovered, 
 do not meet force with force; simply disengage. 
 
 Never make your parries wild; make them as close as possible. 
 
 Never make a blind attack with the hope that it may go home; 
 wait for a good opening, and then let him have it with force and life. 
 
 Don't try to parry with your left hand; make your parries 
 with the rifle. 
 
80 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 
 
 Practice the lunge continually and make it as long as possible. 
 Remember, every inch counts. 
 
 Never neglect to straighten the right knee in thrusting or 
 lunging; if this knee is bent, it will shorten your lunge from 4 to 6 
 inches; that will make the difference between a hit and a miss. 
 
 In thrusting and lunging the right foot must be flat on the 
 ground; this is very important and is frequently neglected. (I 
 cannot see why this was omitted from the Manual.) 
 
 Keep your bayonet low. It is better to have it too low than 
 too high. I believe that if the bayonet point is held at the height 
 of the chin, it is too high. The height of the second button on the 
 blouse or chest is better. A good swordsman or a man using the 
 lock guard will get imder your guard if your point is too high. 
 
 Circle around your opponent and get the light in his eyes, then 
 attack. Do not let him do this to you, or force you onto bad 
 ground. 
 
 If you are a small man,, do not be afraid of a big man; he may 
 be stronger than you are, but you make up for that by being more 
 active. Stay at a distance from him (bayonets must always cross, 
 however), and don't allow him to get in a position where his superior 
 strength will count. If you are a large man, do not despise a small 
 man; he may be as quick as a cat. Try to close with him, and 
 get in a position where your superior strength will tell. 
 
 Use your head always. 
 
 The class was formed in two lines facing each other^ about 
 5 yards apart. 
 
 One instructor cannot well supervise more than sixteen men. 
 
 Men should remain in the position given until ordered to return 
 to the guard. 
 
 Men should execute each movement very slowly at first until 
 they thoroughly understand how the attack or parry should be 
 made. The instructor should carefully note the manner in which 
 any movement is executed. Many men are in the correct position 
 after the completion of a movement, but their manner of getting 
 there is faulty. (Especially true of parries.) 
 
 Bayonets were crossed after ten hours' instruction (plastrons 
 and maskg opt used). One lijie was then ordered to deliver an 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 81 
 
 attack (the othei line remaining at the guard). Care was taken 
 that the bayonet (fencing) point touched the point attacked. 
 These attacks weie made slowly and caiefuUy. Later, one line was 
 ordered to attack and the othei line was ordered to parry. These 
 movements taught the attacks and parries foi same. Plasjtrons and 
 masks weie not used at this stage of the instruction . They are 
 not necessary if the movements aie executed correctly. Speed was 
 developed later. The object of this instruction was to teach at- 
 tacks and parries only. Do not hurry through this stage of the 
 instruction. The more time devoted to this instruction the better 
 the result later on. Give frequent short regfts. Make your in- 
 struction sharp while it lasts^ but avoid tiring the men. Try to 
 hold their interest. 
 
 All the movements embraced in the Manual were taught and 
 the men weYe directejd to study the bobk alsjo. 
 
 The following exceptions were made in the poisjitions laid down 
 in the Manual and some new movements taught. 
 
 Guard. 
 
 Guard (Correct). 
 
82 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 
 
 The rifle should be turned to the left until the bayonet is flat. 
 The position laid down in the Manual leaves the fingers of the left 
 hand exposed. By turning the rifle to the left they are protected 
 by the gun-sling and upper sling swivel. From the engage right, 
 if a glancing blow is struck, the swivel and gun-sling will catch the 
 rifle. In the position laid down in the Manual (with the piecje only 
 slightly turned to the left) the fingers will be stAick. 
 
 Guard (Incorrect). 
 
 Some difficulty was experienced at first in getting the men to 
 take the correct position of guard. Most of them would get their 
 rifles too far to the rear — that is, the right hand would be near the 
 right hip, instead of to the front and on a line with the left hip, or 
 in froht of the belt buckle, as it should be. In order to correcjb this 
 defect, and to explain to the men the necei^ity of always assuming 
 the correct position of guard, two men were ordered to engage. 
 Men were taught that in the engage bayonets should cross about 8 
 inches from the point. No. 1 was then directed to move his rifle 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 83 
 
 to the rear until his light hand was opposite to his right hip. No. 2 
 WAS ordered to advance slightly, maintaining the coirect position 
 of guard, and being careful to see that bayonets crosfsed about 8 
 inches fiom theii points. It was then pointed out that if both men 
 weie to lunge at the same time, No. 2's bayonet would s,tiike fiist, 
 because, paiadoxical as it may seem, No. 2 is closer to No. 1 than 
 No. 1 is to No. 2. It will be found that theie will be a diffeience 
 of from 8 to 16 inches in the distance that each man's bayonet is 
 fiom his opponent's chest. 
 
 After this demonstration, little difficulty was experienced in 
 getting men to assume the correct position of guard with the rifle 
 well forward. 
 
 Throw Point. 
 
 Being at guard : 1. Throw, 2. Point. Throw the piece straight 
 to the front, with the right arm fully extended, retaining the grasp 
 of the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock, at the same 
 time raising the right arm until the hand is in front of the shoulder, 
 barrel up, edge of bayonet down, point directed at the point to be 
 attacked; at the same time drop left hand to left thigh with a slap. 
 
84 COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 
 
 Recover at once and lesume the guard. Do not try to hold the 
 lifle up with the right arm or hand. If properly executed, the mo- 
 tion imparted to the rifle by throwing it forward and raising the butt 
 will sustain it. Recovery must be sharp. 
 
 This is a very nasty attack, if well executed, and very hard to 
 pairy. It is not difficult to teach, if men do not try to hold the 
 lifle up with the right arm. It must be executed smartly to be 
 effective. 
 
 Stop Thrust. 
 
 Being at guard: 1. Stop, 2. Thrust, 3. Guard. Throw the 
 rifle to the front to the full extent of both arms, barrel up, allowing 
 the left hand to shde along the stock, right hand grasping the rifle 
 at the small of the stock, both hands and butt in front of and at 
 the height of the chin, point of bayonet directed at opponent's face 
 or chest; at the same time draw back left foot until heels touch, left 
 toie pointing straight to the front. Resume the guard. 
 
 Useful when opponent thiusts, lunges, oi cuts, and is veiy 
 effective if made smartly and with life. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 85 
 
 Being at guard, to attack low lines: 1. Drop point, 2. Lunge, 
 3. .Guard. Lowei lifle with left hand until hoii2ontal; do Hot 
 move light hand; lunge at the point to be attacked. Resume the 
 guard. 
 
 Lunge. 
 
 Being at low parry right oi left, to letutn: 1. Up, 2. Lunge, 3. 
 Guard. Raise the point with left hand until rifle is horizontal, 
 barrel to the left, right hand at about the height of the neck; lunge 
 at the point to be attacked. Resume the guard. 
 
 Being at parry high, to return: 1. Parry high, 2. Return, 3* 
 Lunge, 4. Guard. Turn rifle to the front with the left hand, rifle 
 horizontal (or pointing upward if attacking cavalry), barrel down, 
 right hand at the height of the neck; lunge at the part to be at- 
 tacked. Resume the guard. 
 
 A common error in executing this movement is to turn the rifle 
 wlhife lunging. If this is done, the man may be in the coiiect position 
 when the movement is completed, but the lunge will not have been 
 
86 
 
 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 piopeily executed and will not go home; fuitheimoie, theie will be 
 QO foice back of it. The lifle must be turned fiist, and then the 
 limge made. 
 
 Left Point (1). 
 
 Being at guard: 1. Left point, 2. Two, 3. Guard. Atthefiist 
 command laise the piece with both hands so that the light aim is 
 fully extended to the light on a Une with and at. the height of the 
 shouldeis, ban el down, bayonet point pointing to the left, bat i el 
 resting on the left arm just aboVe elbow, front sight to the left of 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 87 
 
 Left Point (2). 
 
 left aim (not inside). Two. — ^Thiuatto theleft at the point to be 
 attacked to the full extent of the left arm. Guard. — ^Resume the 
 guard. 
 
 This movement is much better than changing fiont and then 
 thiusting and gives as long a reach. The head should be turned to 
 the left in this movement. 
 
88 
 
 COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 
 
 Being at guard : 
 
 1. Right short thrust, 
 
 2. Two, 3. Guard. At 
 the first command 
 throw the rifle to the 
 rear with both hands, 
 barrel up; regrasp it 
 with both hands, the 
 left hand at the bayo- 
 net grip, thumb over 
 the barrel, edge of 
 bayonet down, left 
 hand directly in front 
 of the light hip and 
 touching the body; 
 
 Right Short Thrust 
 (2). 
 
 right hand grasps rifle at the balance, 
 thumb along the piece. Two. — ^Thrust to 
 the front to the full extent of the left 
 arm. Guard. — ^Resume the guard in the 
 most convenient manner. 
 
 This movement is used when the op- 
 ponent is so close that ordinary attacks 
 carmot be us.ed. It is useful in the break- 
 away or in mob-work. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 89 
 
 Lock Guard Butt Strike (1). 
 
 Being at the engage right and your opponent having his bayonet 
 point too high: 1. Lock guard, 2. Butt strike, 3. Guard. At the 
 first command step forward with the right foot and plant it so that 
 the right heel will be about 30 inches in front oif and about 6 inches 
 to the light of the left heel; tuin on ball of left foot until left toe is 
 pointing to the left; at the same time carry the piece to the front so 
 that the left hand will be about 14 inches in front of the chest and at 
 the height of the second button on the blouse, right arm close to 
 the body, right hand about in fiont of the right elbow, barrel to the 
 left so that o^pponent's bayotiet is securely locked, bayonet guards 
 
90 
 
 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Lock Guard Butt Strike (2). 
 
 touching. At the second command step forward with the left foot 
 and plant it about 30 inches in front of and 6 inches to the left of the 
 light toe, which should now be pointing straight to the front; at the 
 same time execute butt strike at opponent's neck, raising on the 
 right toe when blow is deliveied. Resume the guard. 
 
 Thig is a very nasty attack and theie is only one guard for it, 
 and ihat is rear pass. If executed with life, it is very difficult to get 
 away fiom the blow. It sjiould never be allowed in fencing combat; 
 it is entire V too dangeious. It sihoXild be taught and diiUed oftep, 
 but only at command. It is impossible to execute this movement 
 from engage left, neither can it be done if bayonet points are held low. 
 
 Impress upon the men at every opportimity to rely on the 
 point. The edge is good to have and gives you an advantage over 
 a man who has only a thrusting weapon, but the point is the more 
 dangerous of the two. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 91 
 
 Men are taught to always lunge (foot movement) when de- 
 livering a cut. Finish the cut with a shaip motion like ciacking a 
 whip, and then draw bayonet to the rear while holding it against 
 opponent's part attacked. The last motion of the cut and diaw 
 must be executed simultaneously to be effective. 
 
 Example. — ^Take a sharp saber and deliver a straight cut, 
 without drawing, against a rug or blanket i oiled iand suspended from 
 a tree. You will find that you can make no impiepsion upon it. 
 Now deliver a light cut, ending with a sharp ciack, and diaw at the 
 same time. You will find that you can cut the lug in two with little 
 force or effort. Cuts, to be effective, must be delivered in this 
 manner, and bayonets should be sharpened before taking the field • 
 Dull bayonets aie veiy likely to stick in a woimd; Efhaip ones will 
 cut their way out. 
 
 In Samar, P. I., in 1900, men of the 9th Infantry frequently 
 had to place their foot on an enemy after killing him with a bayonet 
 before they could withdraw it. This will not happen with a sharp 
 bayonet. I know. While operating in Samar in 1905-6-7, I re- 
 quired my men, both regulars and scouts, to sharpen their bayonets , 
 and we had no difficulty on that score. 
 
 Being at guaxd, at engage right: 1. At left ann, 2. Cut, 3. 
 Guard. Raise point over that of your opponent, turning rifle at 
 the same time so that the edge of the bayonet will be down; lunge 
 (foot movement), and cut down at opponent's left arm or hand. 
 Resume the guard. 
 
 Being at guard, at engage left or right: 1. At left hand, 2. Cut, 
 3. Guard. Dro^ point of bayonet until point is about 8 inches 
 below opponent's left hand, turning rifle so that the edge will be 
 down; limge (foot movement), and cut with false edge at left hand. 
 The guard for this is low parry right, rear pass, lunge, throw point, 
 or stop thrust. 
 
 All the engagemesnts laid down in the Manual were taught, 
 and the cut over in addition. 
 
 Being at guard, at engage right oi; Left : 1. Cut, 2. Over. Raise 
 your point until it clears that of your opponent, then drop your 
 point to the other engage. Do not draw rifle to the rear. 
 
 Practice the following: Engage right, engage right and lefts 
 
02 
 
 COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 
 
 cut over and engage left, cut over and engage right, engage right 
 and left and cut over, etc., etc. 
 
 Low Parry Right. 
 
 Low Parry Left. 
 
 Being at guard : 1. Low parry, 2. Right. Cany the point of the 
 bayonet about 6 inches to the left, then diop the point, desciibing 
 a quaitei-cucle to the light until point is about 6 inches to the right 
 of and at least 36 inches in fiont of light knee. Finisji with a snap 
 like cracking a whip. A common eiroi in executing this movement 
 is to drop the point to the front and right. At the completion of the 
 movement the man will be in the coiiect position, but his opponent 
 will have gotten inside of his pariy. The point mus't fiist be moved 
 to the left and then lowered and brought to the right to catch the 
 other rifle and parry the attack. Another common error is to have 
 the point too far to the right; 6 inches is really more than enough. 
 
 Being at guard: 1. Low parry, 2. Left. Carry point of bayonet 
 6 inches to the right, then diop point and desciibe a quarter-circle 
 to the left imtil point is 12 inches to the left of and at least 36 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 93 
 
 inched in fiont of left knee. , Finish with a sinap like cracking a 
 whip. The 12 inches to the left of the left knee is nfecessaiy to 
 protect the left thigh. 
 
 A common error is to raise the point and desjcribe a circle out- 
 waid and to the left. The man may be in the correct position at 
 the completion of the movement, but his opponent will have gotten 
 inside of his parry. Point must first be moved to the right (to 
 coirect this tendency), then lowered and moved to the left to catch 
 opponent'? lifle and paiiy attack. 
 
 High Parry Right. 
 
 High Parry Left. 
 
 Being at guard, a cavalryman passing you on your right flank 
 and delivering a right low cut: 1. High parry, 2. Right. At the 
 second command laise the piece with the left hand until vertical; 
 at the same time carry it to the right so that the right hand will be 
 opposite to and about 12 inches fiom the light hip, left hand grasping 
 the piece at the balance, piece about 14 inches in fiont of second 
 
94 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 button on the blouse, baiiel towards the body, piece veitical. (Body 
 must turn slightly to the light on hips.) This parry covers the 
 whole light side fiom the hips above the head. 
 
 Being at guard, a cavalrjonan passing you on your left flank 
 and deliveiing a left low cut: 1. High parry, 2. Left. At the 
 second command laipe the piece with the left hand until veitical; at 
 the same time cany it to the left, light aim close to body, light 
 foreaim hoiizontal, right hand in fiont of left hip, ban el to the lear, 
 left elbow between lifle and body, piece suppoited by fingers of left 
 hand, thumb pointing to the fiont, head and eyes turned to the left, 
 body facing squaiely to the front. This pairy covers the whole left 
 side, fiom the hips to above the head. 
 
 Each diill should alwaye commence and end with at least five 
 minutes (by the watch) being devoted to thrust, lunge, and throw 
 point. Five minutes of each diill ^nould always be devoted to 
 thiusting at rope knots (suspended) about 5 inches in diametei. 
 
 Do not allow the men to get too close. Make them make an 
 effort to reach the knots; otherwise this exercise has Uttle value. 
 
 The volts should be taught and frequently practiced. I beiieve 
 that it is best, in making the volts, to turn on the ball of the left foot. 
 Biing the rifle to port arms when volting; you will find that you 
 pieseive youi balance better. 
 
 It may have been noticed that in the abpve couise no time was 
 devoted \jo foot movements. Men dhould know these and the 
 Manual before taking up this couis^e. 
 
 It must be understood tnat the above couise can only be given 
 after men have had some instiuction in bayonet exercise; otherwise 
 it will take at least foity lessons to make a man proficient, and this 
 instruction would have to be given consfecutively. 
 
 My stihedule was arranged as follows: 
 First five lessons, attacks; 
 Second five lessons, parries; 
 
 Third five lessons, attacks and parries in combination; 
 Fourth five lessons, combat. 
 
 Plastions and masks weie not used in the first fifteen lessons. 
 
 All movements were executed at command, and when both 
 lines engaged, movements were made carefully, so there was no 
 danger. Plastrons and masks were always used in combat. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 95 
 
 When men have been through the above couise, they will be 
 able to work out innumerable combinations and will have a good 
 practical working kno\vledge of bayonet fighting. 
 
 Remarks on Fencing Equipment. 
 
 The mask is good and strong and leaves little to be desired. 
 It would be better if the mesh were a little coarser and the wires a 
 little laigei, so that men could see better. 
 
 The plasjbron is not entirely satisfactory. The sleeves ehould 
 come to the wrists and the chest be padded a little more. 
 
 The gloves are not s atisfactory. We have a striking weapon 
 (cutting bayonet), yet there is no padding oVer the wrists. I found 
 it necessary to have my men pad the^ir wrists to skve them from 
 mariy nasty blows. The leather used in the gloves tears too easily 
 and is not thick enough. The padding in the gloves is not thick 
 enough. Many men frequently get nasty cuts and blows due to 
 this defect. 
 
 The fencing bayonets are a joke. They bear abstplutely no 
 resemblance to our bayonet, break at the Sjlightest provocation, and 
 are fastened to the rifle by two bands cut seven-eighths through 
 by screw-holes, and break at the first blow in cons^equence. I de- 
 vised a reinforcement for holding the bayonet to the rifle, which 
 cost very little and was made by the post blacksmith from a model 
 furnislhed by me. It can be readily made from the drawing shown. 
 I believe that the bayonet should be made stiffer. Many men are 
 struck fairly, but do not know it. The bayonet should be firm 
 enough to give a blow that would be felt without injuring a man. 
 
 The rifle is satisfactory and leaves little to be desired. Spare 
 parts and extra gun stocks should be isfeuedwith each rifle, so that 
 repairs could be made in the company. I have never been able to 
 get extra gun stocks or spare parts for my fencing iifles; conse- 
 quently it has always been necessjary to send them to an arsenal 
 for repairs, which wastes a lot of time and is unnecessarily ex- 
 pensive. An infantry officer of experience in this subject should be 
 ordered to an arsenal and permitted to experiment with the fencing 
 equipment until a satisSfactory one was developed. It should not 
 cost much, nor would it be difficult or take much time; thirty days 
 would be ample. 
 
m COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 PROPERTY. 
 
 The most difficult problem that govemois of States, adjutant 
 geneials, and National Guard officeis generally have to solve is the 
 car 6 and pieseivation of Fedeial and State piopeity. This is due 
 to many causes^ among which may be mentioned a faulty militia 
 system, lack of discipline, and ignorance on the part of officeis and 
 men in regaid to accountability and responsibility. 
 
 The govemoi of a State is responsible and accountable to the 
 Federal Government foi all Fedeial piopeity issued to the State. 
 However, the governor of a State is not bonded, and the only way 
 that the Fedeial Government can recovei fiom a State for propeity 
 lost of damaged is to withhold the amount from the next allotment 
 due such State, or to charge it against a current allotment. 
 
 The adjutant general of a State is not bonded fo!r the Federal 
 pioperty which is practically in his care, although he is diiectly re- 
 sponsible and accountable to his goveinoi. The position of the ad- 
 jutant general in the State is practically that of the Secretary of 
 Wax in the Federal Government. He handles the property, but 
 cannot be held responsible foi its los^ ol damage in a pecuniaiy way. 
 Of couise, he is morally responsible to the governor. 
 
 The piactice in most States is to bond the company com- 
 mandeis and other officeis lesponsiible for State and Federal prop- 
 erty; but this bond is a State bond, and the officer is responsible to 
 the Stat^only. 
 
 The greatest difficulty encjounteied in caring foi Federal and 
 State pioperty is to get officeis and men to thoroughly leaUze that 
 when an article is lost, it must be accounted for and paid for by 
 some one-^ usually the company commander or other officer re- 
 sponsible and accountable. Another thing that they do not thor- 
 oughly appreciate is that when one officer is *'long" (or ahead) on 
 property some other officiei or man is boimd to be "short" (or 
 behind) and this man is the one who is "stuck" for it. If National 
 Guard officeis and men would cooperate with each other ^ as is done 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 97 
 
 in the rlegular petvice, and when they find that they are *4ong" 
 on some articje would help other officers out who are "shorit," it 
 would simplify matters greatly; but the majority will not do this, 
 as they have the ever-present fear that they too may be "shoit" 
 at some time. 
 
 The system of issuing property t^ enlis'ted men is usually faulty 
 in that no receipts aie taken at the time of issue, frequently no 
 record is kept of the issue, and often men are allowed to take the 
 property home. This system is peimicious*, and will invariably 
 result in loss. 
 
 Later on I will outline a system which, if followed, will enable 
 responsible officers to keep tracji of property isbued,* and which 
 should prevent loss to a great extent. 
 
 Accountability and Responsibility. 
 
 Much misunderstanding exists in the minds of National Guard 
 officers in regard to resi)onsibility and accountability. An officer 
 is automatically res^osible for any property, Federal or State, which 
 comes into his possession in any marmer whatsbever. An officer is 
 accountable fo!r any property which has been invoiced to him and 
 for which he has signed receipts and for which he makes a return. 
 An officer can be respponslble foi property without being accountable 
 for the same. An officdr can be accountable for property without 
 being responsible for it. For example, when he carries prbperty on 
 his returns for which he has signed receipts and which he has issued 
 on a memorandum receipt. The officer who signs the receipt be- 
 comes responsible for the property, while the first officer is still ac- 
 countable for it, as he still carries it on his papers. He become re- 
 sponsible foi it only if the memorandum receipt is lost or destroyed 
 or in case he has allowed it to leave hisf hands without taking a re- 
 ceipt. If he issued property on a memorandum receipt without 
 authority for so doing, he retains his respohsibility. However, the 
 other officer is aisp responsible for the property by the mere fact of 
 it having come into his possession. It does not matter how he gets 
 possession of Federal or State property; if it is in his posgesfe5on, he 
 becomes automatically responsible for its care and preservation. 
 
 It will be seen from the above that an officer can be responsible 
 
98 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 for piopeity without being accountjabie foi it; he can be accountable 
 foi pi operty without being ies\)onsibe foi it; and lastly, he can be 
 both lerponsible and accountable foi property in his possession. 
 He will abo retain hit lesponsibility and accountabihty foi it if it is 
 lost oi destroyed until he has been cleared by a board of survey. 
 If he is cleared by the surveying officer frpm all responsibility foi its 
 loss or damaged condition and the proceedings are approved by the 
 Secretary of War, then the approved proceedings are a voucher by 
 which the officer can drop the property from his return; or, if he is re- 
 sponsible for it only, then the approved proceedings will clear him 
 from lesponsibility. The approval of the governoi will allow him 
 to drop State property. 
 
 Property Responsibility. 
 
 Any officer or enHsted man who has Federal or State property 
 in his possession is responsible for it, its care and preservation, so 
 long as the property is in his hands. There are no exceptions to 
 this rule whatsoever. He has no light to sell, give, or otherwise 
 dispo Sfe of this propel ty; if he does, he is guilty of a Federal offense, 
 foi which he can be severely punished by a United States courlt; and 
 there are usually State laws which cover State property. 
 
 It is the duty of any officer or man who acquires Federal or 
 State property, except by regular issue or purchase (when expressly 
 allowed by law), to immediately report the fact to his superior offi- 
 cer and turn the property over to him, so that it can be taken up 
 on returns and properly accounted foi. 
 
 It is the duty of any officer who receives property under the 
 above conditions to immediately take the same up on his returns 
 with appiojpiiate remarks, such as "Found at si/ation," "Turned 
 in," etc. An officer who fails to do this is guilty of a geiious offense, 
 for which he can and should be punis^hed. 
 
 Property Accountability. 
 An officei who is accountable fo!r piopeity s)hould make regular, 
 correct, and pi^ompt returns for the same. This is woefully neg- 
 lected in the National Guard, and the avoidable loss of much 
 property results. Thouslands of dollars' worth of property is an- 
 nually lost through this cause alone. In leality the propeity is 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 99 
 
 not actually lost, but all record of its whereabouts is lost, which 
 amounts to the same *jhing. I have known of cases where an active 
 campaign of piopeity-hunting bi^ught to light two oi three thousand 
 dollars' woith of propeity in a single State. 
 
 Few company commandeis in the National Guard leally know 
 just how much propeity they are accoimtable for. They usually 
 depend upon the quarteimastei seigeant, and he ia either caieiess 
 and loses tiack of the piopeity oi he goes to the othei extreme and 
 attaches himself to any aiticle that happens to come within leach, 
 thereby making some othei quaiteimastei seigeant and accountable 
 office! "short." This is usually treated as a joke, when in reality 
 it is a i-eiious offense, which should be rigidly surpiessed. 
 
 Frequently accountable officers are ignorant of the method to 
 pursue to clear themselves from responsibility for property lost, 
 damaged, or worn out through fair wear and tear in the service. 
 This is another cause of f hortage. Property becomes unserviceable 
 through fair wear and tear, and this fact is not reported to the ac- 
 countable officer by the quartermaster s^eigeant. The property 
 lies around the store-room, becoming more worthless and un- 
 sightly from day to day, and finally the quartermaster seigeant, or 
 the aitificei, oi the armorei, oi someone else, concludes that it is 
 an eye-soie, of no value any way, and he, whoevei he may happen 
 to be, puts it in the ash-can. When a check is made, the accountable 
 officei is "short," and no one remembeis what became of the article, 
 or if he does he holds his peace, because he finds that he has done 
 wrong and does not want to be "called down." If a survey had 
 been asked for as soon as the article became unserviceable, and it 
 was examined and acted upon at once, this would not happen, 
 and the officei would not be "short." 
 
 It may be taken as a rule that more piopeity is misplaced in 
 the National Guaid than is actually stolen or lost. 
 
 When piopeity is lost or stolen, the lesponsible officei should 
 immediately lequest a survey to investigate, repoit upon, and fix 
 the responsibility for the loss. If an officer neglects to do this at 
 once, he may be pietty sure that he will be "shoit" in his piopeity 
 and will have great difficulty in dealing himself later, as it is then 
 difficult to get affidavits, and the people coiicerned forget the cir« 
 
100 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 
 
 cumstances oi have left the State or locality and cannot be leached. 
 Under these circumstances it is veijy difficult foi the suiveying 
 officer to ascertain the facts and arrive at a definite conclusion. He 
 usually has but one course open, and that is to find the accountable 
 officer responsible, when, as a matter of fact, the property may have 
 been lost through circumstances over which the accountable officer 
 had no control; but his failure to take prompt steps to clear himself 
 lesults in his having to pay for the property. Under these circum- 
 stances he has no one to blame but himself. 
 
 Causes Which Produce Avoidable Loss. 
 
 Carelessness in making out property returns. 
 
 Carelessness in checking property. 
 
 Carelessness in iss^uing property. 
 
 Carelessness in marking property. 
 
 Lack of system in caring for property in store-rooms. 
 
 Permitting unauthoiiz,ed persons to have access to store-rooms. 
 
 Permitting unauthotrized persons to have Government property 
 in their possession. 
 
 Allowing officers and enlisted men to take property to theii 
 homes, instead of keeping it in the armory at all times (when not 
 actually in use), as required by law. 
 
 Failure to check property periodically. 
 
 Failure to apply for surveys promptly when property If lost, 
 damaged, or worn out. 
 
 Failure to carefully check property when issued prior to going 
 to camp. 
 
 Lack of discipline and failure to hold squad-leaders responsible 
 foi property while in camp. 
 
 Failure to carefully check property after the return from camp. 
 
 Lack of system in packing and storing property in going to and 
 coming from camp. 
 
 Ignorance on the part of officers and men in caring for property 
 generally. 
 
 And last, but not least, lack of discipline. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INPANTI^'Y}.'' 101 
 
 Causes Which Produce Unavoidable Loss. 
 
 Theft. 
 
 Deseition. 
 
 File. 
 
 Bui^laiy. 
 
 Insecure stoie-iooms. (Fault of spmepne, but not always 
 responsible officei.) 
 
 Lack of stoiage facilities. (Fault of someone, but not always 
 I esponsible officer.) 
 
 Loss of piopeity in field seivice. (Not smnmei camps.) 
 
 Method of Applying for Board of Survey. 
 
 Read caiefully Paiagiaphs 105 to 127, "Regulations of the 
 Wai Depaitment foi the Oiganiz^d Militia," 1910. 
 
 Read caiefully Paiagiaphs 710 to 726, "U. S. Aimy Regula- 
 tions," 1913. 
 
 National Guard officeis aie not peimitted to submit ceitificates 
 in place of affidavits', as is done in the Regular Seivice. 
 
 Officeis and enlisted men of the Organized Militia must submit 
 affidavits containing what they know about the los^, damage, oi 
 destiuction o^ Fedeial pippeity. • ' 
 
 Some States have special legulations in legaid to State property. 
 
 Write a letliei to the adjutant general of the State, requesting 
 that a surveying officer be appointed, in the following form: 
 
 Origanization, 
 
 Place, 
 Fiom: Officer making appUcation. Date. 
 
 To: The Adjutant General, State of — ^— . 
 
 Subject: Request that emveying officei be appointed to act 
 on (state class of piopeity). Request that a suiveying officei be 
 appointed to examine into, xepoit upon, and fix the lesponsibility 
 foi (heie state loss, destruction, or damaged condition of) toe fol- 
 lowing (heie state class of piopeity, oidnance, quaiteimastei, 
 medical) ai tides, the piopeity of the United States oi of the State 
 of — , which was issued to (heie state individual oi organiza- 
 tion), and for which I am lesponsible and accountable oi (respon- 
 sible) or (accountable) (as the case may be), and which has (here 
 state briefly the circumstances of the case) lost, destroyed, or has 
 become unserviceable thiough fail wear and tear in the State Service. 
 
 Fill out D. M. A. Form No. 16c and forward it with letter. (For 
 Federal property only.) Signature. 
 
102 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 
 
 Befoie making this application, cariefully investigate the cii- 
 clumsltances yourself and s ecuie all the evidence that you can in the 
 foim of affidavits, 30 that when the auiveying officei ai lives you will 
 have a complete cas e to present to him. Don't put this off until 
 he aiiive^, becjausfe men may tell you one thing and tell the suiveying 
 officei an entiiely diffieient stoiy. 
 
 You should have a supply of Division of Mihtia Affaiis Foim 
 16c on hand. If you have not got them, wiite to the adjutant 
 geneial of the State foi them befoie you lequest the suivey. 
 
 When the sjuiveying officei has completed his repoit and it has 
 been appioved 01 dislappioved by the Secietaiy of Wai (in case of 
 Federal property) or by the governor (in the case of State property), 
 you will be notified by the adjutant general and will then know 
 whethei you have been cleaied 01 not, and what disposition to make 
 of the plopeity, assuming that it has not been lost. Until you le- 
 ceive this notification you aie still lesponsible 01 accountable, 01 
 both, and the property ihust be caiijied on youi letuins (if you 
 make any). 
 
 Remembei, a sepaiate smvey lepoit must be made in the case • 
 of each class of piopeity. Foi example, don't place oidnancte and 
 quartermaster property on the same survey repoit. If you have 
 oidnance, quaiteimaatei, and medicpl supplies to be acted upon, it 
 will lequiie thifee sepaiate suivey lepoits. Some States peimit dif- 
 ferent cesses of piopeity to be placed on the same lepoit, but this 
 applies to piopeity owned by the State only. It can never be done 
 with United States piopeity under any circumstances. This rule 
 holds good in making out lequisitions foi United States piopeity, if 
 you evei entei the Fedei al Sei vice. A stepai ate i equisition is required 
 foi eadh class of piopeity. Much of the conf\isjion and delay in 
 getting piopeity duiing the Spanish Wai was due to the fact that 
 National Guaid and Volimteei officei s did not know this. I know 
 of one casle which occuiied duiing this wai in which an officei made 
 out a 1 equisition foi a horsje, saddle, blankets, clothing, and com- 
 mi- saiy sjupplies all on one i equisition, and then damned the Gov- 
 ernment because he did not get them. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 
 
 103 
 
 
 K o 
 
 • a 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 Pi 
 
 6. 
 
 Manner in which Articles were Lost, Destroy- 
 ed, Damaged, or have become Unserviceable 
 or Unsuitable for Service, and Particulars in 
 which Unserviceable or Unsuitable. 
 
 1 ! 1 ! ! i ! ! 1 ! ! ! 1 ! ! ! ! 1 ! ! 1 1 1 ! 1 
 
 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 
 
 I 1 ' ' I 1 1 ' ' I ' I ' I ' 1 1 I I I ! ! 1 I ! 
 
 
 6. 
 
 Existing 
 
 Condition of 
 
 Property. 
 
 ! ! ; ! ! ! : ; 1 ; ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 1 1 ! ! ! ! ! i 
 
 i ! i i ; ! i ! i i i i i i i i ! i i i i i i i i 
 
 
 4. 
 
 Condition of 
 
 Property when 
 
 Received. 
 
 
 
 2. 3. 
 
 When Re- 
 Quantity, ceived by Or- 
 1 ganization. 
 
 
 -; 
 
 
 i 
 
 < 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 r-(r-lr-lr-t^,-lrHrH^r-.r«l(NC^(N(N(N 
 
 OQ B 
 O (U 
 
 a> (u 
 2 o 
 
 ^S 
 
 if J 
 
 0,== ; 
 
 t.«^ i 
 
 «*^ r a> oQ 
 
 f» <u d "^ 
 JeS.2 2 
 
 ^ IV U <i) 
 
 
 1:? O 
 
 09 M 
 
 03 O 
 
 :'3 Is** 
 
 « S ft a> 
 ^ «^-J^ d 
 
 
104 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 1. Officeis lesponsible foi piopeity to be surveyed will list 
 s;ame on Foim No. 16c, Division of Militia Affaiisj, and complete 
 the affidavit at the bottom of Md foim. To this affidavit should 
 be attached the affidavits of all peisons having knowledge of ma- 
 terial facts bearing on the loss of, damage to, or condition of the 
 property, and all evidence on which the responsible officer relies 
 for reUer from accountability. When all evidenre is complete, it 
 will be forwarded to the quaijter master general of the State (or the 
 adjutant general, depending upon State regulations). , 
 
 2. Property to be surveyed will be considered under three 
 headings, viz.: "Unserviceable through Fair Wear and Tear in 
 Service,'' "Lost, Destroyed, or Damaged on Account of Fire," and 
 "Lost. Destroyed, or Darnaged thiou^ Other Causes." Affidavits 
 should cover but one class of property. 
 
 3. When received at the State arsenal, affidavits of respon- 
 sible officers will be attached to Form No. 16, Division of Mihtia 
 Affaiis, and the total quantities of the several articles Usted thereon, 
 together with the total value of the property as shown by current 
 pi ice lists. 
 
 4. Each report of survey should cover but one of the classes 
 of property detailed in Paragraph 2. 
 
 5. When completed, all papers will be forwarded to the adju- 
 tant general, who will appoint an officer to survey the property. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 105 
 
 Following is a sysjbem to be followed to prevent pi opeityfiom 
 being lost or misplaced, and the method to be usjed In oaiing foi 
 unseiviceable piopeity until ^jame is piopeily disposM of. The 
 caie of piopeity is pietty well coveied by a previous chaptei in this 
 book, but f 01 convenience and leference the piopei system to be 
 followed will be outlined again in this chapter: 
 
 1. Eveiy article of Goj^einment piopeity should be piopeily 
 marked, as lequiied by oideis an(| regulations. Read Pa^agiaphs 
 281, 290, 292, 2^, 294, aud especially 295, "United States Aimy 
 Regulations," 1910. It is not necess^iy to maik lifles, as each lifle 
 has a numbei. Gun-pliags and all othei leathei equipments can 
 and should be marked. Regulations do not lequire clothing to be 
 marked in the Regular Service, but it is usually maiked on the inside 
 with the letter of the company and numbei of the legiment and the 
 man's company individual numbei. In the National Guaid I con- 
 sider it absolutely necessary to mark clothing. If this is not done, 
 it is practically impossible to fix responsibiUty for the lo^ of clothing 
 or keep track of it. For instancte. Brown los'es his blouse; it is not 
 maiked; he picks up Smith's, of his own or another company, and 
 Smith is "shy'* a blouse and so is his company commander, and 
 theie is no way of fixing the responsibility. If clothing is properly 
 marked, this cannot be done, because an irispection will reveal the 
 real culpiit. This fact will make enlisted men decidedly moie 
 caieful in the caie of piopeity. It is the same way with canteens 
 and haversacks and othei oidnance piopeity. If they aie pibpeily 
 maiked, they will not get lost, or be stolen; but if they aie not, they 
 will almost certainly be lost or at least rni^aid, which will amount 
 to the same thing, as far as the accountal3le officer is concerned. 
 The only safe rule to follow is to mark everything that is movable. 
 
 2. Keep an acduate Record in the company of every article 
 that you are accountable oi iesi)onsible foi. Keep this lecoid 
 youiself and lequue the quaiteiinas'tei seigeant oi aiknoi'ifei to keep 
 a duplicate of it. 
 
 3. See that youi stoie-ioom is secuie and that no unauthoiized 
 peisons have access to it. The piactice of taking enlis]ted men into 
 the stoie-ipom to be fitted to clothing oi to have aims and equip- 
 ments issued to them is wrong. Theie should be a half-dooi, and 
 
106 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 ai^icles slhould be pa^Ssed out to the men when necessiary. They 
 should nevei be peimitted to entei the sJtoie-ioom, even when the 
 quaiteimastei sergeant is present. He may tuin his back. Tiust 
 eveiybody, but don't take any chances. 
 
 4. Have articles systematically arranged in the store-room. 
 It does not matter what system you use, provided you have some 
 system. Have all ordnance in one part of the room and each article 
 in a place by itself. For instance, don't mix knivesj, forks, spoons, 
 and oiler and thong-cases. Have all clothing arranged in another 
 part of the room and keep the different articles separated — ^blousies 
 in one place, breeches in another, hats in another, etc. 
 
 5. Have boxes with locks arranged in which to store un- 
 serviceable property — one for ordnance, another for quartermaster 
 property, etc. Just as soon as an article becomes .unserviceable, 
 place it in its proper box and lock the box. It Sjhould remain there 
 until it has been properly acted upon by a surveying officer and 
 properly dispos'ed of. If you use this system, it won't be placed in 
 the ash-can. 
 
 6. Have a special gim-rack for disabled rifles and place a rifle 
 in this rack as sjoon as it needs repairs. Tag it so that you can see 
 at a glance j usjb what is the matter with it and what it needs. 
 
 7. Have a special box with compartments in which to keep 
 spare parts for rifles and other equipment. The practice usually 
 followed is to have one box and dump everything into it. The 
 result of this practice is that you never can find what you want, and 
 more than half the time you don't know exactly what you have or 
 what you need. I know of one company that had a third of its 
 rifles out of commifi|s)ion and had plenty of spare parte to repair 
 them, but these parts were in a box with old buttons and other 
 perfectly useless junk, and no one in the company knew that they 
 were in the store-room at all. You may think that this was an 
 exceptional casp, but my experience has been that it is not the 
 exception, but the normal case in the National Guard. 
 
 8. Keep a book in which is entered every article of clothing 
 and equipment issued. Make the man sign a receipt in this book 
 when he gets the property. This is a better system than slips, be- 
 cause they get lost and misplaced; a book does not. Never under 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 107 
 
 any circumstances let anything get out of the store-room without 
 taking a receipt for it. Now this may seem like a lot of woik, 
 but, as a matter of fact, it is much easier than periodically having 
 to hunt for lost and strayed property and will not, in the long nm, 
 take a quarter of the time. 
 
 9. Nevei let youi men take and keep property in their home. 
 It is contrary to law in the first place, and you will almost surely 
 have to pay foi the property if you do. 
 
 10. See that each man has a lockei with a lock on it, in which 
 he can place piopeity issued to him. If you have his leceipt and he 
 loses the property, you can usually collect foi it by means of the 
 delinquency comt. Thi^ of course, is covered by State law, but 
 most States have fi^me way of recovering. 
 
 11. Make periodical inspections, slay every three months, and 
 check up your property, 
 
 12. I have found that it is much better and muqh simpler to* 
 have the blanket-rolls made up at all times. If you have to turn 
 out in a hurry, you are prepared. These rolls should be made up 
 under the supervision of an officer, and you will find that blankets, 
 pins, poles, ropes, etc., will not nearly so readily get lost or 
 misplaced. 
 
 13. Keep your haversacks complete the same way, with knife, 
 fork, spoon, tin cup, bacon bag, and skit, coffee, and sugar sack. 
 Inspect them frequently, and thesip small articles will not get lost. 
 Theie shotild be a peg under the blanket-roll, upon which should be 
 hung the packed haversack and the canteen. If yoii habitually u^ ^ 
 gaiiison belts for drill, the field belt and suspenders can be hung 
 on this peg, and your entire field equipment will be together. 
 
 14. Never remove the suspenders from the field belt; they 
 belong to it and it is required by Regulations, and this will prevent 
 them from getting lost or mislaid, as they most surely will if you 
 allow them to be removed. 
 
 15. Intrenching tool^, identification tags, and first-aid pouches 
 and packets should never be issued until you are ordered to go out 
 on sbrvice. These articles will surely be lost if you is^ue them 
 before. Some experienced National Guard officers advocate the 
 keeping of front-eight covers in the atore-room also. 
 
108 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 16. Oilei and thong-cases, biushes, and thongs should always 
 be kept in the lifles and fiequent inspections made to see that they 
 aie theie. 
 
 17. Nevei take ai tides of equipment apart to clean them 
 until you are leady to do so; then leassemble them at once. 
 
 18. Follow the above rules, and you should have no difficulty 
 in taking care of youi property; neglect them, and you will surely 
 be "short." 
 
 WAR DEPARTMENT, 
 
 OFFrCE OF THE ChIEF OF StAFF, ' ' • 
 
 CrRCULAR \ Division of Mimtia Affairs, 
 
 No. 7. / Washington, Apiil 30, 1915. 
 
 1. Information having been requesjted as to whether or not 
 a stoppage can legally be made against an office! or enlisted man of 
 the Organized Mihtia for loss or damage to United States property 
 issued for the use of the Organized Militia of a State, and rf so, 
 whether or not such 6;toppage can be made against any pay that 
 may be due or become due fi'om allotments* to a State under the 
 provisions of Section 1661, Revised Statutes, or from the Federal 
 appropriation for "Encampment and Maneuvers, Organized Mil- 
 itia," the following opinion of the Judge-Advocate General of the 
 Army, which has received the approval of the Secieta^y of Wa*, 
 and the pxoceduxe necessary to make the stoppages in question, a^e 
 published fox the infoiniation and guidance of the Organized Militia 
 of the United States! 
 
 The views of this office are desired on the question whether or 
 not a stoppage can legally be made against an ojBBcer or enlisjbed man 
 of the Organized Militia under the provisfions of Section 1766 of the 
 Revised Statutes for loss of United States property, such stoppage 
 being made against any pay that may be due him from Federal 
 allotments to a State under the provisions of Section 1661 of the 
 Revised Statutes^ or from Federal appropriations for ^'Enckmpment 
 and Maneuvers of the Organized Militia" under the Act of March 
 4,1915. 
 
 The question arises on a request fd^ information "as to what 
 pro^cedure is necessary to put a stoppage against an officer of the 
 Organized Militia upon the United States pay-roll, 'Encampment 
 and Maneuvers,' who has lost Federal or State proper tv." 
 
 Undei Section 13 of the Militia Act of January ^1, 1903 (32 
 Stat. 775), as amended, all property issued to the Organized Mihtia 
 remains "the piopeity of the United States" and must be armually 
 "aecoimted foi by the governor of the State * * * as required 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 109 
 
 by law"; and the State is theiefoie responsible, as bailee of the 
 piopeity, to the United States, foi damage to oi loss of the piopeity, 
 unless lelieved of such lesponsibiUty in the mannei piesiciibed by 
 the statute. It is theiefoie the duty of the State authoiities, wheie 
 any officei oi soldiei to whom such piopeity is issued oi in whose 
 custody it is placed is les^onsible foi the loss theieto by theft, 
 damage, etc., to take such steps to have the les^oiisibility foi the 
 loss 01 damage fixed by a suiveying officei of the Militia, whose le- 
 poit, when appioved by the goveinoi, will deteimine whethei oi 
 not the State is to be lelieved of ileoponsibihty foi the piopeity. 
 See Section 4, Act of June 22, 1906 (34 Stat. 449). The piopeity, 
 howevei, as stated above, lemains the piopeity of the United 
 States; and while the Government lobks to the State as bailee of 
 the piopeity fox the caie of the piopeity, and holds the State re- 
 sponsible foi any loss oi damage theieto, except siioh loss oi damage 
 as ie£ults fi|om a cause with lespect to which the State is entitlSi 
 to be relieved; I am cleaily of the opinion that the statutes do not 
 pieclude an officei or soldier of the MUitia who is lesponsible me- 
 diately foi the loss 01 damage of the piopeity fiom being charged 
 therewith. 
 
 Under the pi o visions of Section 1766 of the Revised Statutes, 
 the pay of any peison "who is in aiieais to the United States" 
 may be withheld until he has accoimted foi and paid into the 
 Tieasuiy all s!ums foi which he may be liable; but thif section has 
 appUcation wheie theie aie transactions of a pecuniary nature be- 
 tween the officer and the Government. Independent of thiti section, 
 the pay of any peison may be withheld to make good a lodis for 
 which he is legally responsible, unless there is a statute which would 
 preclude such action. Under the regulations respecting the care of 
 public property any officer who has the custody of Government prop- 
 erty is responsible for it, regaidless of wheie the accoimtability or 
 responsibility might otherwise rest on paper; and thie general rule 
 is, that all officers are responsible for any Government property of 
 which they have the custody, and the mere fact that an officei has 
 not receipted foi any given article olaimot be assigned as a warrant 
 for his failurte to exercise the utmost diUgence under all circumstances 
 to see thatsuch property is properly safe-guarded. He will, of course, 
 be liable only where a losjis has been incurred and wheie it is due to 
 his failure to exeicise that degree of care which the circumstances 
 require. (Dig. Op.f J. A. G., 1912, 908F.) I see no reason, therefore, 
 why a regulation may not be adopted with respect to Militia prop- 
 erty which shall provide that wheie an officei oi enlisjted man of the 
 Organized Mihtia is found by a surveying officer to be responsible 
 for the loss of any Government property isslied to him oi placed in 
 his custody, and the lepoilt of the surveying officei is appioved by 
 the governor of the State, the proper disbur^Qg officei shalli upon 
 
110 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 request of the goveinoi, entei the value of the piopeity so lost as a 
 stoppage against any pay that may be due suSi officer oi enlisted 
 man fiom Federal allotments to the State under the provisions of 
 Section 1661 of the Revised Statutes, oi from Federal appropriations 
 for *'Enciampment and Maneuvers of the Organized Mrlitia" under 
 the Act of March 4, 1915. 
 
 2. In conformity with the approved opinion of the Judge- 
 Advocate General ^ven above, if an article of United States property 
 issued to the Organized Militia of a State, Ter^ritory, or the District 
 of Columbia be lost or damaged by the negUgence or fault of any 
 officer or enlisted man thereof, he sjhould pay the value thereof or the 
 cost of repairs neces^^ary to place the article in s erviceable condition. 
 The amount so charged the officer or enUsted nian should be entered 
 on the pay-roll against any pay that may be due him or may subse- 
 quently become due him, the said amount being entered on the roll 
 opposite the name of the officer oi enhsted man so charged, but the 
 amount sb charged should not excjded the value of the article or 
 cost of repaus, and only on conclusive prjoof and never without a 
 survey, the officer or enlisted man being informed at the time of 
 signing the roll that his signature will be regarded as an acknowl- 
 edgment of the justice of the charge. 
 
 3. In case of charges on pay-rolls (War Department Form No. 
 368) covering payments made by United States disbursing officers 
 appointed under the provisjLons of Section 14 of the Mihtia Law, 
 credit will be taken m column 8, "Amount Paid,'' for the total 
 amount of pay due, and the amount collected on account of such 
 charges will be deposited with the Trieasurer of the United States 
 to the credit of the appropriation "Arming and Equipping the 
 Militia." The disbursing officer will notify the Chief, Division of 
 Militia Affairs, of the fact, stating the name of the depository, the 
 amount of deposit, the allotment to which the money pertains, and 
 that the amount represents collections on pay-roll for United States 
 property lost, damaged, or destroyed, and the number of the cer- 
 tificate of deposit (Paragraph 165, Regulations for the Organized 
 Militia, 1910). Upon receipt of notification froni the Treasurer 
 that the amount has been deposited, it will be credited against the 
 allotment of the State concerned under Section 1661, Revised 
 Statutes. 
 
 4. In case of charges on pay-rolls. War Department Form 
 No. 367, covering payments made from the Fedeial appropriation 
 "Encampment and Maneuvers, Organized Mihtia,'* the entry on the 
 pay-roll will be made as indicated in Paragraph 2 of this circular. 
 The collection will, however, be made by the quarter maeteli of the 
 Regular Army making the payment, and disposed of as required by 
 Army Regulation^ 
 
 5. The approved sluvey report covering the charges for 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). Ill 
 
 piopeity lost oi destioyed will Constitute the piopei vouchei foi 
 diopping the aiticle fiom the piopeity letuiin affected. The ap- 
 pioved suivey lepoit coveiing ohaiges foi damages will be letained 
 as a pait of the State's lecoids, the date of the appioval being in 
 eveiy case enteiled upon the pay-ioll on which the chaige is made. 
 
 6. Attention is invited to the provisions of Paragraphs 121, 
 122, and 123, Regulations of the Organized MiUtia, 1910, governing 
 the procedure to be followed when charges for United States prop- 
 erty lost or damaged are collected from payments made to officers 
 and enlisted men fiom State funds. (D. M. A., 55614.) 
 
 By 01 del of the Secietaiy of Wai : 
 
 H. L. Scott, 
 Official: Brigadier General, Chief of Staff. 
 
 A. L. Mills, 
 
 Brig. Gen., Geneial Staff, 
 
 Chief, Division of Militia Affairs. 
 
112 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 LECTURE No. 1 
 
 Of a Series of Ten Delivered to the Officers and Sergeants 
 OF THE National Guard of Arizona. 
 
 This paper is the first of a series of ten lectures which I de- 
 livered to the officers and sergeants of the National Guard of Ari- 
 zona. This course deals with the following subjects in their logical 
 order: 
 
 1. Camps; 
 
 2. Security of Camps or Outposts. 
 
 3. Marches and Advance Guards. 
 
 4. Reconnaissance and Patrolling. . 
 
 5. Contact and Deployment foi Action. 
 
 6. The Attack. 
 
 7. The Defense. 
 
 8. Intrenching and Intrenchments. 
 
 9. Defense of Houses and Locahties. 
 10. Training foi Battle. 
 
 CAMPS. 
 
 When the oider is received foi mobilization, the first thing that 
 you gentlemen will have to do is to place youi commands in camp. 
 It is essential that the camp be made sanitary and comfortable. 
 Men must never be made to undergo more h^rdsliip than is una- 
 voidable. They must be well housed, well fed, and amusied. A 
 contented camp is a healthy one. The moment men become dis- 
 contented youi sick repoit begins to creep up. 
 
 Great care must be exeicised in training new men; they must 
 not be woiked too hard at first, ox you will break down many men 
 who, if handled intelligently, would soon develop into hardy soldiers. 
 The best way to harden men is to go about it gradually-^^nothing is 
 gained by forcing them. It is like training a colt; if you run him 
 too far oi work him too hard, you will luin him completely and he 
 will never be any good. 
 
 Many men upon going to camp have trouble with their feet. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 113 
 
 This is due to the fact that they have been wearing civilian shoes, 
 which, in the majority of cases, have been too tight and too short. 
 When they commence to wear the Government shoe their feet com- 
 mence to expand and resiime their normal shape; this throws more 
 strain on the arches), and as a result the men complain that their 
 sjhoes do not fit and that they cannot wear the Government shoe. 
 No attention whatever should be paid to these complaints, and men 
 must be required to wear the Government shoe, whether they like it 
 or not. The new shoe is\ without question, the best military 
 marching shoe in the world. The Shoe Board worked on it for two 
 years, and examined all marching shoes in use in the armies of the 
 leading powers. 
 
 Troops upon going into mobilization camps should be given three 
 periods of setting-up exercises, of ten minutes each, three times daily, 
 Sundays included. A very important part of these exercises is the 
 foot exercise, in which men raise on the toes, keeping the heels to- 
 gether, with hands on hips, thumbs to the rear and touching. If 
 this is carried out without fail, it will do more to harden men and get 
 them in shape than any other mode of training. This exercise (foot 
 exercise) will strengthen the arches and muscles of the feet to such 
 an extent that in three weeks your men will have no trouble with 
 their feet, and will be able to make marches that, had this exercise 
 not been given, would lay half of your men by the roadside. 
 
 Another thing: Every company should be amply provided 
 with foot powder and adhesive plaster for treating blisters. It may 
 be taken as a rule that at least 90 pei cent of all blisters can be 
 treated with adhesive plastei in such a way that the men can 
 continue to march from day to day until the blister has healed. I 
 have repeatedly seen blisters 2 inches long and about 1 inch wide 
 fixed up with adhesive plaster so that a man could make a fifteen- 
 mile march without discomfort. But remember, every blister must 
 be treated at once, and not allowed to go until the man is disabled. 
 
 Foot inspection should be held every night in camp and at the 
 completion of every march. If you neglect this piecaution, you will 
 lose at least 50 per cent of your men in the first fifty miles that 
 you march. 
 
 Men must be required to ditch theii tents and gather hay or 
 
114 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 grass or branches for a bed. They will not do this unle&s you i equire 
 it ; old soldiers will, but reci uits will not. A hollow should be scraped 
 in the ground for the hipS;. You must see that this is done; don't 
 tell the men to do it, but sfee that they do it. A neglect of this 
 simple precaution will spoil a man's sleep and wiU in consequence 
 render him unfit foi the following day's work. No man can march 
 and drill from day to day and s'tand the other hardships of a cam- 
 paign unlesb he gets a good night's rest. New troops break down 
 in campaign because they neglect these simple precautions. 
 
 Watch your kitchens like a hawk. They mutt be as clean 
 as a pin. 
 
 Watch youi cooks and see that they bathe daily and always 
 have on clean clothesi Do not tolerate any excuse whatever in 
 this respect. 
 
 Pits must be dug under your kitchen fire? and filled with stones 
 so that all liquid matter can be poured on these stones under the 
 file and evaporated. Solid matter can be burned on the fire or 
 buried in pits and immediately covered with dry earth like the 
 rears. Whenever food or slop- water is dro|)ped on the ground, it 
 must be immediately covered with earth oi ashee to prevent it from 
 attracting flies: You cannot delegate these things to the cooks or 
 to a sergeant. You must see to it yourself until your men are 
 trained. Watxih your cooks and kitchen police and gee that all 
 pans and cooking utensils are carefully scrubbed and rinsed. Most 
 cooks are careless in this respect and fail to was h all sbap from the 
 pans and kettlest As a result, men are given a daily dosjie of sipap 
 with meals, whici will soon give the entire company dysentery. 
 
 You must have two kettles in which the men can wash their 
 mess-kits: one with boiling s.oapy water and a hand mop, in which 
 to wash them, and one with boiling clean water and a hand mop, 
 in which to rinse them. A reliable non-commissioned officer should 
 be detailed to stand by and see that every man properly washes his 
 mess-kit. Simply telling him to do it is not sufficient. 
 
 During the Spanisli War an officer of Volunteer Artillery came 
 to me one day and stated that about 75 per cent of his men were 
 sick with diarrhoea, and that he could not find out what had caused 
 it. He asked me if I would not come over and inspect his camp. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 115 
 
 I told him that I would be glad to do so, and I immediately went to 
 his battery kitchen, watched the cooks washing their cooking uten- 
 sils, and watched the men wash their messrkits. I found that they 
 were doing exactly what I had surmised they were doing — namely, 
 not washing the soap from kitchen utensils and mess-kita. I told 
 him what the trouble was, gave him instiuctiouF how to correct the 
 defect, and as a result the diarrhoea stopped in about three days. 
 This is always a serious matter, but in this case it was doubly so be- 
 cause we were in the face of the enemy. 
 
 Now you must pay special attention to your rears;. They must 
 be properly conttructed, and it will be necessary to post a sentinel 
 over the rear to see that men cover their deposit at once. They 
 won't do this unless there is someone standiug over them to see 
 that they do it. You must secure toilet paper; no matter how you 
 get it, but you must have it. Tjiis is a proper charge against the 
 company fund. If you don'i do this, men will use newspaper, or 
 more frequently will not use any paper at all, none being available. 
 This method will soon produce piles, and you will have men on sick 
 report as a result. Reais must be made comfortable; otherwise 
 men will not use them and will get in the habit of going off in the 
 bushes and defiling the camp-site. 
 
 Urinal cans must be placed in the company streets at su,ndown 
 and whitewashed. Lime or ashes must be sprinkled where they are 
 placed, and their use enforced. ^ 
 
 Neglect the above precautions, and in a few days your men 
 will all be sick and unfit for field service. 
 
 Selection of Camp-Sites. 
 
 The first and most important requirement for a camp is an 
 abundance of good, pure water. This overshadows all other con- 
 siderations. The next requirement is good ground, which will not 
 become muddy in wet weather or very dusty in dry weather. The 
 worst place that I can think of for a camp-ground is a plowed field. 
 You warnt gi^avel or grass. The best place for a camp is a grove of 
 tre^ — trees not too close together. 
 
 Always pitch your tents in the sun, so that they will get thor- 
 oughly aired out and dried. But you must have shade within at 
 least two hundred yards of the tents, so that the men can go to it 
 
116 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 during the heat of the day. If no shade is available, have yout* men 
 place their blankets and ponchos on top of the shelter-tents. This 
 will keep out the heat of the sun, air the blankets, and render the 
 tent very much cooler — cool enough, at least, for the men to find 
 shelter from the excessive heat. 
 
 Bathing-places must be provided for the men and they must be 
 recluired to bathe at least three times per week. You have got to 
 see that they do this; lice will develop if you don't, and any officer 
 that allows his command to get lousy should be tried. To get rid 
 of lice, boil all clothing; have men scrub themselves with strong 
 laundry soap; cut the hair close; and pick over, sun, and beat the 
 blankets. They are not (difficult to get rid of if you go after them 
 in a determined manner. Another method is to pack the blankets 
 in boxes and spray them with formaldehyde. Do this at reveille* 
 and in twelve hours everything in the blankets will be killed. The 
 ammonia preparation used for cleaning your rifles is even more 
 effective if used in this manner. 
 
 Flies. 
 
 The worst pest of a camp and the most dangerous enemy is the 
 simple house fly. Fight them continually. Fly-traps, purchased 
 or improvised, are extremely useful around kitchens and rears, al- 
 though these may not be screened. You will be surprised at the 
 nuinber of flies that can be caught in the open by fly-traps, and it 
 wiU astonish you what a difference they will make in a camp. 
 
 I could write a book on camps, but I have endeavored to bring 
 out the most important points and the ones that are most frequently 
 neglected. If you gentlemen will take dare of the above, the rest 
 will take dare of itself. 
 
 Horses. 
 
 Horses must not be allowed in camp, and th^ corral should be 
 at least five hundred yards from the men's tents, if possible. All 
 horse-droppings mufet be policed up immediately and burned, as 
 flies breed in manure in a short time. 
 
 Mounted officers and orderlies are prone to tie their horses in 
 camp. This should not be permitted. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 117 
 
 LECTURE No. 2. 
 OUTPOSTS AND CAMP GUARDS. 
 
 In the previous lecture you gentlemen were told something 
 about placing your men in camp upon mobilization and how to care 
 for them. This lecture will deal with the guards that will be nec- 
 essary in order to preserve order in your camp and, if in the presence 
 of the enemy, secure your camp from surprise. 
 
 Upon arrival at the camp, the first thing to do is to place a 
 guard over your water supply. Set apart a place from which to get 
 drinking water, then lower down a place for the animals to drink, 
 and then still lower down a place for the men to bathe and wash 
 clothes. 
 
 You will have to place a sentinel over the rears, which should 
 be dug immediately after the tents have been pitched (nothing 
 should be allowed to interfere with this). It is essential that the 
 ground be not defiled in the slightest degree. 
 
 Sentinels will also be necessary over the corral, store tents, 
 forage, etc. 
 
 These details having been made, you will have to estabUsh the 
 outpost, relieving the advance guard if the camp is at the completion 
 of a march. Never place any more men on outpost than is abso- 
 lutely necessary to accomplish the object — ^namely, to protect your 
 camp from surprise. Outpost duty is very trying and wears the 
 men out. On the other hand, the outpost must be strong enough 
 to hold the enemy, if he attacks, long enough to allow your men to 
 form and deploy to meet thfe attack. It is not necessary to surround 
 you*r camp with a cordon of outposts imless operating against sav- 
 ages in minor warfare. In civilized warfare it is usually sufficient 
 if the lines by which an enemy is likely to advance are covered. 
 Remember, the outpost lines must always be convex — ^never, under 
 any circumstances, concave; that is, the flanks must always be 
 refused (thrown back), so that the enemy cannot work around 
 them. It makes absolutely no difference what the formation of the 
 ground is, this rule m^jst be followed. 
 
 You mufet always have patrols out in front of your sentinels. 
 Do not rely upon sentinels alone. Patrols should go about two 
 
118 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 miles beyond the line of sentinels. You must patrol day and 
 night. The neglect of this simple precaution caused the surprise of 
 General Grant's army at Shiloh. Communication must be main- 
 tained between the different parts of the outpost at all times;* 
 signal flags, telegraph lines, mounted messengers, and infantry 
 patrols being some of the means used. Everything must be re- 
 ported to the outpost commander. It is infinitely better to report 
 too much than too little. Experience will soon teach you the correct 
 method. New troops are prone to neglect this very important 
 duty. Never relax your vigilance. Simply because you do not 
 see the enemy is no sign that he is not there. The Confederates 
 formed their battle-line within 1,000 yards of the Union sentinels in 
 broad daylight, at the battle of Shiloh, without being discovered. 
 The mere fact that cavalry is out in front is no excuse for not being 
 constantly on the alert. The enemy may have defeated your 
 cavalry or driven it off at a flank, so there may be no cavalry there 
 at all. It is a wise precaution to place a few men with signal equip- 
 ment on any adyalntageous point from which a good view of the 
 country may be obtained and too far to the front to be included in 
 the outpost liuip. 
 
 A good way to remember the formation of an outpost line is to 
 compare it to a hand with the fingers extended. Let the finger-nails 
 represent the sentinels or line of Cossack posts, the second joints 
 the pickets or supports, the knuckles the reserve, and the wrist the 
 camp. In small commands the reserve is usually omitted as being 
 unnecessary, the main body taking its place. 
 
 There are two general systems of outposts — one in which the 
 entire front is covered by a line of sentinels and the other in which 
 only the main avenues of approach are guarded by small bodies and 
 the intervening space patrolled. The best results will usually be 
 obtained by a combination of both systems. These systems are 
 usually referred to in military works as the Cordon System and the 
 Patrol System. There are two methods of establishing the Cordon 
 System. The first method is to post small bodies of about twenty- 
 five men each along the entire front at suitable intervals (these are 
 called "pickets"), who send out sentinels to their front from 100 
 to 200 yards. (Distances always depend upon circumstances, how- 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 119 
 
 ever.) These pickets are backed up by larger bodies, called ''sup- 
 ports," posted from 600 to 800 yards in their rear, one support for 
 ' three or four pickets (depending upon circ^imstances), and in rear 
 of the supports, at about 800 or 1,000 yards, the reserve. The camp 
 would ordinarily be about 1,200 yards in rear of the reserve. These 
 distances apply to a regiment as outpost for a division. For smaller 
 commands the distances should, of course, be much less; but the 
 distance from the Cossack posts to the supports or from the pickets 
 to the support cannot safely be less than 400 yards, and from the 
 supports to the reserve about the same distance. The main body 
 in the above case could be about 600 yards in rear of the reserve. 
 
 Cavalry should never be used as an outpost for infantry, if it 
 can possibly be avoided. This duty is much harder on cavalry 
 than on infantry, and soon ruins the horses. Cavalry is too valuable 
 for scouting and reconnaissance to be frittered away in this manner. 
 This does not mean that cavalry patrols cannot be sent out in front 
 of the line of sentinels; on the contrary, this should be done; but the 
 pickets and supports should be composed of infantry. In the first 
 two years of the Civil War the Union Army wasted its cavalry 
 shamefully in this manner. It was due entirely to the ignorance of 
 the generals in the proper use of cavalry. They learned better later 
 on. Don't make the same mistake. 
 
 Single sentinels can be used in the day-time, but it is always 
 better to use double sentinels at night, especially with new men. 
 They see an advancing enemy in every bush and even in blades of 
 grass. This is not so likely to happen if you place two men on 
 guard. They have more confidence, and perform their duties better 
 in consequence. 
 
 There are three systems of posting sentinels : 
 
 The Cossack Post System, in which small groups, consisting of 
 an old soldier or corporal and three men, are sent out from the sup- 
 ports about 400 yards. The sentinel is posted direct from this 
 small post, which is in concealment about 30 or 40 yards in rear of 
 him. These small groups are usually relieved every twelve hours. 
 These posts are of American origin, notwithstanding their Russian 
 name, and were evolved by the Continental Army in our Revolu- 
 tionary War. Our troops found that in operating in wooded 
 
120 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 country, where the picket and sentinel system was used, the reUefs 
 frequently lost their way at night and in the woods; so the system 
 was devised of having every sentinel backed up by his own reliefs. 
 This system has many advantages and has more resisting power 
 than appears at first sight. Sentinels are not timid, knowing that 
 they are closely backed up by a friendly post, and an additional 
 advantage is that it takes fewer men than does the picket and sentinel 
 system. 
 
 In the Picket System sentinels are furnished directly from the 
 pickets and must be relieved from the picket. This requires that 
 the picket be strong enough to furnish three reliefs for every sentinel 
 posted. An additional strength must be allowed for patrols. These 
 patrols reconnoiter in front of the line of sentinels and maintain 
 communication with the supports and neighboring pickets. 
 
 Another system is to use what are called ''sentry squads. '* 
 The system is the same as the Cossack post, but your sentinels are 
 double, and an entire squad takes the place of the group of four 
 men. This is stronger than the Cossack system, being able to offer 
 more resistance, but, of course, requires more men. 
 
 Fretjuently the best results will be obtained by a combination 
 of all three. The nature of the ground will usually indicate what 
 system to use. 
 
 I will now illustrate the different systems on the blackboard, 
 and will be glad to answer any questions that you gentlemen may 
 care to ask. 
 
 I am going to issue to each one of you a little card containing 
 the orders for a sentinel on outpost. Retain these cards and look 
 them over occasionally until you have committed the orders to 
 memory. This is very important. 
 
 Sentinel^s Outpost Orders. 
 
 The po^ fumishfed by each picket are numbered from right 
 to left, thus: Post No. 4, Picket No. 1; Post No. 1, Picket No 2, 
 and so on. 
 
 Sentinels should watch and listen without betraying their own 
 presence, but observation is the first consideration and concealment 
 is of secondary importance. A sentinel must expose himself to see, 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 121 
 
 rather than limit his observation for the purpose of remaining 
 concealed. 
 
 Sentinels must not smoke, and such conversation as may be 
 necessary between them must be conducted in a "wfhisper. The sen- 
 tinel must not have about him any glittering accouterments; and, 
 except in foggy weather or on a dark night, must keep his bayonet 
 in its scabbard. 
 
 Each sentinel should clearly understand the following: 
 
 1. The countersign. 
 
 2. The number of his own post. 
 
 3. The number and position of his own picket and the 
 
 name of its comm^a^der. 
 
 4. The position of the neighboring sentinels and of the 
 
 examining post, when there is one. 
 
 5. The direction of the enemy and the probable line of 
 
 his advance. 
 
 6. The points to which all roads, paths, and railroads in 
 
 sight lead. 
 
 7. The names of all villages and rivers in view. 
 
 8. The signals by which he should communicate with the 
 
 pickets or detached posts. 
 The mistake of giving sentinels too many instructions and 
 orders should be avoided. If his mind is burdened with many de- 
 tails, the sentinel is likely to become hesitating, timid, and confused. 
 The principal thing is that he should know where to look for the 
 enemy and what to do if he sees him. 
 
 LECTURE No. 3. 
 
 MARCHES AND ADVANCE GUARDS. 
 
 Marching constitutes the principal occupation of troops in 
 campaign, and is one of the heaviest causes of loss. This loss may 
 be materially reduced by proper training and by the proper conduct 
 of the march. A successful march, whether in peace or war,. is one 
 that places the troops at their destination at the proper moment 
 and in the best possible condition. With new or imtrained troops, 
 the process of hardening the men to this work must be gradual. Im- 
 
122 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 mediately after being mustered into tjhe service, physical exercises 
 and marching shbuld be begim. One march should be made each 
 day with full equipment, beginning with a distance of two or three 
 miles and increasing the distaiice daily as the troopfe become hard- 
 ened until a full day's march under full equipment may be made 
 without exhaustion. A very good method is to march the men 
 some distance from camp for drill, lay c^ the packs, complete the 
 drill, and then put on packs and return to camp. If necessary, 
 troops may be marched around the camp for a mile or two before 
 the drill commences, in order to cover the desired distance. 
 
 A practice march conducted once a week has little, if any, 
 value for untrained or unhardened troops. A practice march once 
 or twice a month is, in my opinion, absolutely worthless. Its only 
 result is to disgust the men, produce sore feet, and waste time that 
 might with proj&t be devoted to something else. The marching effi- 
 ciency of an organiztition is judged by the amount of straggling and 
 elongation and the condition of the men at the end of the march. 
 
 The drinking of water on the march should be avoided as much 
 as possible. If a mstfn commencete to drink early in the march, he is 
 almost always sure to suffer from lack of water and thirst before the 
 march is half over. Your non-commissioned officers must bfe in- 
 structed to see that men do not commence to drink from their can- 
 teens early in the march. I have found that a very good scheme to 
 prevent the men from drinking water is to require them to place 
 their canteens where they are hard to get at; this will frequently 
 deter the men from drinkuig unless they are really in need of water. 
 With the new infantry pack, the canteen can be carried on the back 
 in the center of the pack in such a way that a man will have to get a 
 comrade to get his canteen for him, as he cannot reach it himself. 
 Many men will go without water in preference to getting some man 
 to get their canteens for them. In any case, the man can't get at 
 his canteen without the knowledge of his squad corporal. 
 
 Closing up during a halt or changing gait to gain or lose dis- 
 tance should be prohibited. 
 
 Most troops make the mistakfe of marching too fast. The gait 
 should not be over two miles per hour until the men have become 
 thoroughly hardened. Officers at the head of the column, setting 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 123 
 
 the pace, are frequently to blame for this. An officer leading a 
 march should frequently turn aroulnd and observe the column to 
 see how the men are standing it, and if he notices that the column 
 is straggling, he should immediately reduce the pace. Nothing is 
 gained by getting into camp with about half of your men. 
 
 I am going to mention another thing that hardly belongs here, 
 but you should know it. Remember, the quartermaster sergeant, 
 artificer, company clerk, and the two cooks always march with the 
 company wagon or with the wagon train. 
 
 The column of twos should never be resorted to on the march 
 unless the road is bad or is very dusty. It doubles the length of 
 your column and makes it just that much harder for the men in the 
 rear to keep up. Always march in column of squads, if possible. 
 Allow the men to open out laterally, but make them keep well 
 closed up. If this method is followed, it affords men an opportunity 
 to pick their way to some extent, gives them plenty of air, and 
 makes the march very mubh easier. 
 
 Two yards between men of the some rank is not too much, if 
 the road space allows it. 
 
 File-closers should be directed to march at the head and rear 
 of their companies. 
 
 An officer should always march at the rear of his company to 
 see that men do not fall out and keep well closed up. 
 
 I have never beheved that the ten-minutes rest prescribed in 
 Regulations is sufficient. I have found in marching troops that I 
 have always gotten better results by prescribing that each rest will 
 be for fifteen minutes. Every man in the command knows before- 
 hand exactly how much time he will have to relieve himself, adjust 
 his eqfuipment, fix his shoes, etc., and it keeps the command in a 
 much better humor. It is very important to keep the men in good 
 humor, and carefully avoid anything that will cause the slightest 
 irritation. Mental worry or irritation wears a command out much 
 faster than physical hardship. A happy and contented column will, 
 without difficulty, march twice as far as a column that is annoyed 
 or irritated or continually nagged. Whatever y6u do, never nag 
 your men. If necessary to speak to them or correct a defect, do it 
 kindly and cheerfully. Undue severity is very, very seldom nee- 
 
124 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 essary. Now, this doesn't mean that men must be coddled, or 
 symtpathi^ed with; on the contrary, this must be studiously avoided; 
 but don't nag them or annoy them continually. 
 
 Another thing, never hurry your men in getting their break- 
 fast or in breaking camp. Frequently, if this is neglected, the 
 command will start out in a humor that will stay with the column 
 all day and very materially affect its marching and fighting. If 
 they are a little late, make up the time on the march by going a 
 little faster or by marching five minutes longer than you would 
 have had they been on time. Now, this doesn't mean that troops 
 must "not be taught to be prompt ; but use judgment. 
 
 I never plrescribe the hour for starting. I prescribe the hour 
 for breakfast, loading wagons, and breaking camp, but I always 
 reserve the right to say when the column will be placed in march. 
 Frequently troops will be ready to start out ten or fifteen minutes 
 before the time you have prescribed if you place it in orders. Take 
 advantage of this, and move out when you have observed that 
 everything is ready. If you hurry them, wagons will not be prop- 
 erly loaded, and this will cause delay later on by the loads slipping, 
 etc.; so you gain nothing after all, and put the command in a bad 
 humor in the bargain. 
 
 General Sherman once said: '*No man can get the best out of 
 his troops unless he commands their spirits as well as their legs." 
 In order to do this, you must be in sympathy with your men and 
 observe them continually. Take care of them, and they will not 
 fail you when you want them. 
 
 Now you officers, upon getting into camp, must see that your 
 men are comfortable first and that their wants are attended to, then 
 have your own tent pitched and look after yourself. But remem- 
 ber, the men must always come fir^t. They are the ones that do 
 the work; you can do nothing without them. When they reaUze 
 that you have their interests at heart, they will meet every demand 
 that you make upon them without a murmur, and will never fail 
 you when you need them. 
 
 Advance Guards. 
 
 If troops could march to the battle-field unmolested like the 
 knights of old repaired to their tournaments, nine-tenths of the 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 125 
 
 difficulties of the art of war would be eliminated. Protection on 
 the march is absolutely necessary, and the neglect of this very simple 
 thing has caused coubtless defeats. 
 
 Had General Braddock (in the French and Indian War) cov- 
 ered his advance with an advance guard, or even a few patrols, he 
 would never have walked into the ambush that he did and was' 
 defeated. 
 
 General St. Clare, of our Army, was sent by President Wash- 
 ington into the Northwest Territory in 1796, after the Indians. He 
 was especially cautioned by Washington to cover his advance and 
 be careful of ambuscades. Notwithstanding this fact, he marched 
 his column without an advance guard or without even advance 
 skirmishers, and was struck by the Indians wheh crossing a river 
 and his column was badly defeated. Up to the time of the engage- 
 ment, like Braddock, he had seen no signs of the enemy, and con- 
 sequently thought that there was none near. 
 
 In 1876 General Crook conducted a march of 1,000 miles 
 through a country infested with 10,000 Indians and never saw one. 
 However, he had an advance guard, and was not attacked or sur- 
 prised. The Indians, however, had his column under constant 
 observation. 
 
 I mention these few instances to show you what will happen if 
 you neglect this important precaution, and also what may happen 
 even when you do have an advance guard. Simply because you 
 don't see the enemy is no sign that they are not there. Never, under 
 any circumstances whatever, neglect to cover your march if there is 
 the slightest chance of encountering the enemy. 
 
 Napoleon once said: "Always place your best troops in the 
 advance guard. These troops must be well drilled and instructed, 
 and will be required to maneuver continually." 
 
 Poor troops in the advance guard are a constant source of irri- 
 tation and embarrassment to a column commander, and will delay 
 the advance of the column instead of facilitating it as they should do. 
 
 It is the business of the advance guard to provide for the se- 
 curity of the column on the march, remove obstructions on the line 
 of march, repair bridges, brush asi(le small bodies of the enemy, and 
 in general to facilitate in every way the march of the column. 
 
126 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 The advance gUard provides for its own security by suitable 
 formations, and not by a cautious and timid advance. This is a 
 common error committed by new troops in the field and also at drill. 
 Instead of advancing briskly, they stroll along at about one and one- 
 half miles per hour when they should be going three at least. The 
 advance guard continually meets with checks, due to the necessity 
 of reconnoitering points some distance from the line of march, 
 clearing the road, fixing bridges, etc.; consequently they must main- 
 tain a good gait, so as not to delay the main body. Remember this 
 and watch it at drill. 
 
 Frequently a marching column will have to protect itself from 
 many directions. This object is secured by the^means of advance 
 guard, flank guards, and a rear guard. Remember, on a retreat 
 the advance guard is usually called ''leading troops." The rear 
 guard in this case is the important body, being next to the enemy ; 
 but leading troops are always necessary to repair and clear the road, 
 prevent a hostile population from damaging bridges, obstructing 
 the road, etc. 
 
 The principle upon which an advance guard is formed is this: 
 The enemy must first be met by a small body, called a ''point," 
 usually a squad; this is backed up by a still larger body, and so on 
 until the main body is reached. 
 
 Each fraction or subdivision must be large enough to hold the 
 enemy long enough to allow the supporting fraction ample time for 
 deployment. The names of these different fractions are as follows : 
 point, support, and reserve. 
 
 A company usually sends forward only a point — about one 
 squad — about 400 yards. 
 
 A battalion should send forward a company, which would form 
 the support, and it in turn would send forward a point. Distance 
 of point from company, about 300 yards; distance of company from 
 battalion, about 500 yards. (This with war strength companies.) 
 
 A regiment should place a battalion in the advance guard if the 
 enemy is close and liable to be met. If the enemy is not close and 
 active, two companies would be sufficient, but this has the dis- 
 advantage that I spoke about in a previous lecture, of breaking up 
 tactical units, which should always be avoided. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 127 
 
 A brigade would usually place a regiment in the advance guard, 
 although two battalions would usually be sufficient; but here, again, 
 we don't want to break up tactical lipits, so we send the entire 
 regimrent. 
 
 The reserve usually marches with as much comfort as the 
 main body. 
 
 Service with the point and with the support is usually very 
 trying, owing to the necessity of sending out patrols, clearing the 
 road, etc. 
 
 Normally, flankers are not sent out to habitually march abreast 
 of the column. This was the old method and has given way to the 
 method of sending out patrols to examine important points, or take 
 station on some high point and observe until the column has passed 
 or there is no sign of danger. Flankers sent out 150 yards from the 
 column are practically worthless; 400 or 500 yards is the minimum 
 distance at which they can be of any use. Remember, we are not 
 trying to find a few men or a scout or two, but we are trying to guard 
 the column from a force large enough to do it some damage. 
 
 Flank patrols are sent out from the support and also from the 
 reserve. They will be left behind and must not attempt to rejoin 
 their own subdivision. They rejoin the column when their mission 
 has been accomplished and then join the nearest unit, reporting to its 
 commander. They rejdin their own uiiit at the first opportunity. 
 Cavalry and mounted scouts or orderlies can save the infantry very 
 materially if detailed for this work. 
 
 If you have any mounted men with the column, it is a good 
 plan to send a mounted point about 600 yards in advance of the 
 infantry point. 
 
 Advance guard patrols are conducted like other patrols. I 
 will explain the conduct of patrols in a later lecture. 
 
 When the column halts at the end of the march or for any 
 length of time before the end of the march, the advance guard forms 
 what is called a ''march outpost. '^ The march outpost is not as 
 complete as a regular outpost, but endeavors to cover all important 
 points and avenues by which an qnejny might advance. They are 
 responsible for the safety of the column until relieved by the regular 
 outpost. Outposts are usually relieved in the evening, in which 
 
128 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 case the organisation forms the advance guard the following day. 
 In large commands troops are usually detailed on this duty for 
 several days at a time, in which case they form the necessary Out- 
 posts until their tour is finished. In the Japanese-Russian War it 
 was the custom in the Japanese Army to detail troops on this duty 
 for two weeks at a time. The Japanese officers told our military 
 attache that the system was very satisfactory. This was with large 
 forces, of course. With small commands, it is usually better to 
 change the outpost and advance guard daily. When changing the 
 outpost, it is usually best to relieve them early in the morning or at 
 evening. If the enemy attacks, he will usually attack at this time, 
 so you will have double strength on the outpost line at that time. 
 
 Under some circumstances a skirmish-line witii wide intervals 
 furnishes a very good formation for the protection of the column. 
 In this case the support can follow in column of squads in one or two 
 columns, as may be necessary. 
 
 Rear guards are formed and maneuvered like advance guards, 
 only the formation is reversed. 
 
 A flahk guard should always throw out patrols, well out on the 
 exposed flank. Flank guards will usually need a small point. The 
 advance guard commander should also command the flank guard # 
 unless circumstances render it not advisable. 
 
 Advance cavalry will usually be under the command of the 
 advance guard commander and, of course, will be several miles in 
 advance of the infantry point. Independent cavalry is under the 
 orders of the commander of the force and is not under the control 
 of the advance guard commander. 
 
 This is a very large subject to cover in one small lecture, but I 
 have endeavored to bring out the principal points. 
 
 I will be glad to answer any questions. 
 
 LECTURE No. 4. 
 
 RECONNAISSANCE AND PATROLLING. 
 
 "How can any man tell what to do when he is ignorant of what 
 his enemy is about?" This remark was made by a celebrated 
 French general. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 129 
 
 . Military information may be considered under two general 
 heads — ^namely: (1) that collected by the general staff in time of 
 peace; (2) that obtained by troops in the field after the outbreak 
 of hostilities. The former relates to the geography, resources, and 
 military strength of the various nations, and enables the War De- 
 partment to decide upon the siiie of an army or expedition, the pro- 
 portion of the different arms, character of clothing, equipment, etc., 
 that may be necessary in the event of war. The latter relates to 
 the theater of operations and to the position, strength, intentions, 
 etc., of the enemy in the field, and is absolutely essential to enable 
 a commander properly to estimate the situation. With the first 
 this paper has nothing to do; I will discuss the latter under "Recon- 
 naissance and Patrolling.' ' 
 
 Information in the field is obtained from various sources — 
 higher commanders, adjoining troops, inhabitants, newspapers, 
 letters, telegraph files, prisoners, deserters, spies, maps, and re- 
 connaissance by scouts and patrols. 
 
 Knowledge of the terrain, always essential to a correct under- 
 standing of the situation, is obtained from a careful study of availa- 
 ble maps, supplemented by thorough reconnaissance. This is why 
 it is absolutely necessary that every officer and non-commissioned 
 officer know how to re&,d a map intelligently. Very few military 
 persons are required to make maps, but all military men will be 
 required to read them, if they are going to play the game with any 
 chance of success. 
 
 Reconnaissance begins as soon as the theater of possible oper- 
 ations is entered, and continues throughout the campaign. No 
 matter what other sources of information may be available, recon- 
 naissance must be depended upon to obtain the information upon 
 which all tactical movements of troops should be based. Recon- 
 naissance preceding deployment for action is of vital importance. 
 Reconnaissance, remember, is continued throughout the action; it 
 does not cease when contact is established. 
 
 Patrols should always be sent out to the front and flanks to try 
 to locate the enemy's line, to find out where his flanks are, and to 
 report upon the nature of the ground over which the attack will 
 have to be delivered. A neglect of this precaution has caused 
 
130 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 numerous defeats. The failure in this respect at the battle of 
 Waterloo in 1815 caused the French cavalry, who were ordered to 
 charge the British lines, to ride into and fill up a sunken road which 
 was in their front and was not known to be there. Of course, the 
 charge failed, and many men were lost needlessly. A swamp or 
 marsh in y6ur front not reported may sto^) the most determined 
 infantry attack. 
 
 Patrols sent out to reconnoiter the ground are usually called 
 ''ground scouts.'* 
 
 It is absolutely essential that the enemy's position be located 
 before the deployment commences; otherwise you are very liable to 
 start your line against the enemy in the wrong direction, and this 
 spells ''defeat." 
 
 It may be taken as a rule that troops deployed and under fire 
 cannot change front. Therefore it is absolutely necessary that your 
 line be started in the proper direction at the comrnencement of the 
 action. Even a slight error in this respect is apt to cause defeat. 
 Your attack will not go home where you want it to, and thus may 
 fail. Even after your attack has been launched in the proper di- 
 rection, it is difficult to keep it going in the same direction. There 
 is always a tendency to oblique, which must be guarded against. 
 Frequently it will be necessary to halt the entire line and start the 
 attack over again by sending a fraction of the line forward in the 
 correct direction and requiring the remainder of the line to guide 
 on them. 
 
 Reconnoitering patrols must be careful to neglect nothing in 
 gaining information. Remember, in questioning civilians it is better 
 to avoid using military terms with which they are not familiar. 
 Don't ask them if they have seen cavalry, infantry, or artillery; but 
 ask them if they have seen soldiers on foot, or on horseback, or with 
 guns on wheels. Don't ask them how many men they have seen 
 because estimates of civilians in this respect are almost sure to be 
 worthless; but ask them when the soldiers commenced to arrive 
 when the last of them got in, etc. You will then be able to calculate 
 the time, and thus estimate the number of men. 
 
 Be careful, in your messages, to separate what you have seen 
 yourself from what you believe or have been told. Don't say, 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 131 
 
 " The enemy is at X, " unless you have seen them there yourself; but 
 say, ^'A civilian reports that the village of X is full of soldiers/' or 
 you may say, '[1 believe that the village of X is occupied by the 
 enemy, because I have seen the following indications'' (here mention 
 what you have seen). 
 
 In questioning civilians, try to enter into a conversation with 
 them, and frame your qaiestions so that they will think they are 
 prompH^ed by natural cutiosity. Don't let them think that you are 
 trying to extract military information, because, if you do, they will 
 likely shut up Hke a clam, unless you are in friendly territory. Re- 
 member, the average town-bred civilian knows little, if anything, 
 of the surrounding country. Country doctors, peddlers, and any 
 man who is in the habit of traveling is more apt to have the informa- 
 tion that you desire. Frequently valuable information can be ob- 
 tained by looking through letters in the post-office and by exam- 
 ining telegrams on file in the telegraph office. Prisoners are always 
 a valuable means of gaining information, but the best person to 
 question them is the guard over them, who can enter into conversa- 
 tion, and thus extract valuable information. Treat your prisoners 
 well, and you will usually be able to get more information from them 
 than you would if you abuse them. 
 
 Be careful, if you are captured, not to give any information 
 whatever. Don't attempt to give false information, because you 
 may unwittingly give real information. 
 
 In reconnoitering, remember it is information that you are 
 after and that you must get it. Don't be afraid to take any risk 
 in order to accomplish your mission. If the safety of your men were 
 the only consideration, they could be left off the battle-field, and 
 then no one would get hurt. 
 
 Napoleon once said, *'You can't make an omelette without 
 breaking eggs." Frequently you will not be able to get information 
 without running risks and losing some men, but it is all in the game. 
 It is team-work that counts, and we want our team to win, no matter 
 what it costs. 
 
 Infantry reconnoitering patrols rarely go more than two miles 
 in advance of supporting troops. If it is necessary to reconnoiter 
 beyond tliat distance, it is better to send cavalry or mounted men* 
 
132 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Information, to be of any value, must be immediately commu- 
 nicated to your commanding officer. An hour or a few minutes' 
 delay may render important information worthless. If information 
 is very valuable, send it by different messengers, who will return by 
 different routes, so, if one man is captured, the other man may 
 
 get through. 
 
 Patrols, 
 
 Patrols are roughly divided into two classes- — small patrols and 
 strong patrols. A small patrol consists of from three to nine men. 
 A strong patrol consists of from ten men to a company. 
 
 Patrols are classified as reconnoitering, harassing, expeditionary, 
 visiting, and combat patrols. In special cases patrols may be given 
 missions different from the above. 
 
 A patrol is a detachment sent out from the command to gain 
 information, or to prevent the enemy from gaining information, or 
 to harass the enemy's outposts or columns on the march, or to blow 
 up a bridge, or capture prisoners, or for any special mission where a 
 small force is sufficient. 
 
 In general, it may be said that the formation of a patrol con- 
 forms to the formation of a large body of troops; that is, it should 
 have an advance guard, rear guard, and flank guards. The patrol 
 must always be formed so as to faciUtate the gaining of information, 
 or to enable it to accomplish its mission and secure the escape of 
 at least one man should it be cut off or captured. 
 
 The usual mistake is to form the patrol so that the men cannot 
 see more than one man can. This is the result of not having the 
 proper formation or sufficient intervals. 
 
 Patrols must always have an advance and rear guard. If the 
 patrol is large enough, it should also have flank guards. It is usually 
 sufficient if these bodies are represented by one man, although with 
 strong patrols three or four men might be placed in each guard. 
 
 When the patrol leader receives his instructions, he should be 
 careful to explain them in detail to all the men of his patrol, and 
 be sure that each man thoroughly understands them. This is nec- 
 essary in tli*e event of Uis being killed, captured, or becoming sep- 
 arated from his patrol. This is very important. Don't forget it. 
 He inspects his patrol and sees that every man is properly armed, 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 133 
 
 equipped, and has good shoes on, and that his feet are in good con- 
 dition, so that he can march and not delay the patrol. No man 
 should be taken along who has a cough, because it might betray 
 the presence of the patrol to the enemy. Of course, no man should 
 be taken who is intoxicated or sick. 
 
 The patrol leader should be careful to see that equipments do 
 not rattle or glisten in the sun. 
 
 The patrol leader should be sure that he thoroughly under- 
 stands his orders, and knows exactly what he should accomplish 
 and just what he is expected to. Don't make the mistake of giving 
 the patrol leader too many instructions. This has a tendency to 
 confiise him a»nd make him slight his work, or he may try to ac- 
 complish too much. 
 
 Patrols should be sent out to accomplish one or at most two 
 objects. If you desire to have three or four things accomplished, 
 it is better to send out three or four patrols, instead of entrusting 
 them all to one patrol. 
 
 The patrol leader should be careful to be sure that he knows 
 where he is to go, how far he is to go, whom messages are to be sent 
 to, and where they are to be sent, also when he is to return. It is 
 always better to return by a different route from the one followed 
 on going out, so that your patrol cannot be ambushed. 
 
 Patrols advance cautiously, but not timidly. Note well the 
 difference. They should endeavor to keep concealed as much as 
 possible, but concealment must not interfere with the accomplish- 
 ment of their mission. 
 
 Hills should be carefully reconnoitered, and from the tops of 
 them a good view of the surrounding country can usually be ob- 
 tained. This should never be neglected. The man detailed for 
 this work should work his way carefully to the top, remain in con- 
 cealment while reconnoitering, and should withdraw with the same 
 caution that he exercised in going up, whether anything is seen or 
 not. The other fellow may be a better scout than you are and may 
 keep concealed. Remember, just because you don't see the enemy 
 is no sign that they are not in the vicinity. 
 
 I^ reconnoitering exposed places, it is better for the patrol to 
 remain in concealment for some time and observe the house or 
 
134 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 village before sending anyone in to complete the reconnaissance. 
 Thep send in two or three men, while the patrol remains in con- 
 ppalment, ready to support them, if necessary. 
 
 Small patrols should never enter a house or enclosure without 
 carefully reconnoitering it beforehand. 
 
 Never trust the inhabitants of a hostile country. The neglect 
 of this precaution has caused the capture of countless patrols and 
 detachments. 
 
 Now, don't try to fi^ht every chance you get. This is a frequent 
 mistake made by new troops. Remember this: A patrol sent out 
 to gain information differs from one sent out to prevent the enemy 
 from gaining information in this respect: the first one never fights 
 unless forced to; the other one fights every time it has an oppor- 
 tunity. One avoids trouble, and the other is looking for a row 
 all the time. Be sure you know to what class you belong before 
 you start out. 
 
 The patrol leader (and the men, if possible) should be familiar 
 with the enemy's uniforms, so that they can report intelligently 
 upoii what they see. 
 
 The number of a regiment in your front may seem a small 
 matter to you, but it may be of vital importance to the commander. 
 For example : Headquarters has information that the 27th Infantry 
 Regiment belongs to the 7th Brigade of the 3d Division; they know 
 that two days ago that division was sixty miles from the battle- 
 field. Now a patrol sends in information to the effect that a dead 
 soldier belonging to the 27th Infantry Regiment was found in the 
 bushes. You see what that means to headquarters; it means that 
 the 3d Division has arrived on the line, or at least the 7th Brigade 
 has arrived; that means that the enemy has received reinforce- 
 ments — a very important thing for headquarters to know. 
 
 If you are familiar with the enemy's uniform and see a soldier 
 in a certain uniform on outpost or on patrol and report this fact, it 
 may amount to the same thing as in the previous case. 
 
 Be careful not to report mounted infantry as cavalry, or horse 
 artillery as field artillery, for the same reason. In horse artillery 
 every one in the battery is mounted ; in field artillery the cannon- 
 eers ride on the limbers and caissons. You can tell mounted in- 
 
COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 135 
 
 fantry from cavalry, because they will not have sabers. All these 
 little things are important. 
 
 Before the armies come into actual contact, it is very important 
 that the first sight of the enemy should be immediately reported. 
 After the first detachment is reported, if you happen to see other 
 small detachments, it is not necessary to report their presence. 
 
 In writing messages, take plenty of time and make your message 
 clear and of some value. It is better to take ten minutes to write a 
 message that is of some value than it is to write one in thirty seconds 
 that means nothing. Always put the time that the message was 
 written on it. Time means everything in war. If you neglect 
 this, your message has Uttle value, if any. 
 
 When friendly patrols are met with, always exchange informa- 
 tion with them. You or they may never get back to your lines, and 
 if you neglect this, much valuable information may be lost. 
 
 I am going to issue you little cards, which contain things that 
 every patrol leader (and private, for that matter) should know by 
 heart. Study them and commit their contents to memory. 
 
 I will now illustrate on the blackboard the formation of patrols. 
 
 Instructions for Patrols. 
 
 A patrol is a detachment sent out from a command to gain in- 
 formation of the country or of the enemy, ,or to prevent the enemy 
 from gaining information. 
 
 In special cases p,atrols may be given missions other than these. 
 
 A patrol sent out to gain information differs from one sent out 
 to prevent the enemy gaining information in this respect: a patrol 
 sent out to gain information does not fight unless absolutely un- 
 avoidable; one sent out to prevent the enemy from gaining in- 
 formation attacks every small body or patrol of the enemy that it 
 encounters. The first avoids trouble and hides when bodies of the 
 enemy are met with, and the other is hunting for trouble all the time. 
 
 Patrols are roughly divided into two classes — small and strong. 
 A small patrol consists of from three men to a squad. A strong 
 patrol consists of from nine men to a full company. 
 
 Small patrols are better for gaining information than large ones. 
 
 An infantry patrol rarely goes more than two miles in advance 
 of the outpost sentinels. 
 
136 . COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 
 
 A patrol should always be formed so as to permit the escape 
 of at least one man, if suddenly surprised or attacked. 
 
 A patrol should be formed as follows: main body, advance 
 guard, rear guard, right flank guard, and left flank guard. If a 
 patrol is very small, some of these will have to be omitted, but it 
 must always have an advance and rear guard. 
 
 With a patrol of four or five men the distances may vary from 
 25 to 50 yards; with a larger patrol they may be as great as 100 yards. 
 
 At times a column or files or a thin skirmish-line with suitable 
 distances or intervals may be a satisfactory formation. 
 
 In very open country distances may be as great as 300 yards 
 without danger. 
 
 When ordered to prepare for patrolling, the patrol leader as- 
 sembles his men, inspects their arms and ammunition, and sees that 
 no man is sick, intoxicated, or has a cough, or has any papers or 
 maps on his person that might betray information to the enemy if 
 captured. He sees that their accouterments do not glisten or rattle 
 when they march. He repeats his instructions to his men, and must 
 be sure that every man thoroughly understands them. 
 
 Besides his arms and ammunition, the patrol leader should 
 have a compass, a watch, a pencil, a note-book, and, when prac- 
 ticable, field message blanks and a map of the country. 
 
 Before sending a message, written or verbal, make the mes- 
 senger repeat it. 
 
 Written messages should state the place, date, hour, and minute 
 of their dispatch. 
 
 In friendly territory, send one messenger; in the enemy's 
 country, two. 
 
 Before starting out, be sure that you know what is expected 
 of you — where you are to go, how far you are to go, and when you 
 are to return. 
 
 Be sure you know where your messages are to be sent. 
 
 Be careful, in your messages, to separate what you know from 
 what you have heard or what you believe. 
 
 State whether you will remain where you are or where you 
 intend to go. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 137 
 
 Combat Patrols. 
 A combat patrol is o;iie which is always sent out from a de- 
 ployed line to guard its flanks from surprise and attack. It must be 
 well out to the flank and slightly in advance of the line, never in 
 rear of it. If attacked, it must resist to the last man until the line 
 has been warned and has had time to prepare for the attack against 
 its flank. 
 
 LECTURE No. 5. 
 CONTACT AND DEPLOYMENT FOR ACTION. 
 
 Usually an action opens by the advance guards coming in con- 
 tact, or the advance guard may nm into the enemy's outposts. 
 
 Whether an action will commence at once under the above con- 
 ditions will depend entirely upon the intentions of the commanders 
 and the orders given to the outpost and advance guard commanders. 
 An advance guard commander may have orders to halt when he 
 encounters the enemy, or he may have been instructed to attack at 
 once, or reconnoiter the enemy's Une and develop his position. In 
 any case the attack should not be ordered until careful reconnais- 
 sance has been made. 
 
 I spoke to you in a previous lecture of the danger of attacking 
 an enemy's position before carefully locating his line. If you butt 
 right in and deploy a large percentage of your men at the commence- 
 ment of the action, and your guess has not been correct, you will 
 be defeated. 
 
 An action is usually preceded (after contact has been obtained) 
 by cavalry combats and engagements between patrols until the 
 entire line has been reconnoitered and you have found the weak point 
 in the enemy's line, or the most favorable ground over which to 
 deliver your attack. 
 
 The commander of the troops should always get as far to the 
 front as he can do so with safety, and, if possible, reconnoiter the 
 ground himself before he orders an attack. He should decide on a 
 plan of attack and carry it through. It is very difficult, if not im- 
 possible, to change your plan after you have once started the attack; 
 
13S Company training (Infantry). 
 
 so decide just what you are going to do, and then do it. Don't 
 haggle, don't vacillate— decide on a plan, and then stick to it. 
 
 The difficulty of reconnaissance increases in proportion to the 
 measures adopted by an enemy to screen himself. You must expect 
 this, so don't be disappointed when you find that it is difficult to 
 obtain any information. Frequently it will be necessary to send 
 forward thin Unes of skirmishers to make the enemy show himself 
 and disclose his position. Sometimes it is impossible to obtain sat- 
 isfactory information until after the action has begun, and that is 
 why you want to avoid a premature deployment. 
 
 Remember that each separate column moving forward to the 
 attack or to deploy for action reconnoiters to its front and iflanks, 
 irrespective of the fact that they know friendly troops are on their 
 flanks. They must maintain communication with these bodies. 
 
 BattaUon commanders in the first line establish patrols to ob- 
 serve and report the progress or conduct of adjbiniiig troops when 
 these cannot be seen. 
 
 Always commence an action by deploying a fraction of your 
 command; you can then control the progress of the action by 
 sending in the supports and prolonging your hne to the right or left 
 as the case may require. For example: A company would usually 
 place one platoon in the firing-line; a battalion, one company; a 
 regiment, two companies; a brigade, one battalion. As the fight 
 opens and you come under fire, you can then tell where to put in 
 your supports and whether the line should be prolonged to the right 
 or left or in an oblique direction. If the first small fraction has not 
 been deployed in the correct direction, no great amount of harm has 
 been done, and you can rectify your mistake before it is too late. 
 
 Deployment for Action. 
 
 After contact has taken place and the reconnaissance has com- 
 menced, troops must be moved up to the front under cover and 
 massed, preparatory to deployment. 
 
 Battalions in close column, regiments in column or line of 
 masses, etc., or troops can assume the formation of a line of columns. 
 A regiment in line of colutnus, with appropriate intervals between 
 battalions; each battalion in column of squads, or the formation 
 
COMPANY TkAtNiNG (JNFANtRY). m 
 
 may be a line of company columns; the head of each company on 
 tfie same line, with proper intervals between companies, each 
 company in column of squads, etc. The terrain and the conditions 
 of the action will govern this. You might have three lines, each 
 battalion in line of comp!any columns. 
 
 Now, don't forget your combat patrols, well out on each flank. 
 They should be sent out as soon as the deployment commences. A 
 deployment commences as soon as the regiment, battalion, or com- 
 pany breaks from the column of march. 
 
 When moving forward to the attack or to take up a position 
 from which to deploy for action, remember to leave your wagon 
 trains well to the rear, where they will be in no danger and where 
 they will not be in the road. If you are victorious, the trains can 
 couae up; and if you are defeated, word can be sent to them to retreat, 
 and they will be sent out of the way before your troops want to use 
 the road. A neglect of this simple precaution has turned many re- 
 pulses into routs and caused the loss of numerous wagon trains 
 that sho\4d have been saved. 
 
 Remember, each battalion is provided with two escort wag- 
 ons, called ''combat wagons'^; these wagons follow the battalion 
 wherever it goes, and are loaded with two bandoliers of cartridges 
 for every rifle in the battalion. This is called the ''extra ammuni- 
 tion.'' This ammunition is issued just before the battalion com- 
 mences its deployment, two bandohers to each man; a soldier will 
 thus go into action with 220 rounds, which should last him through 
 any ordinary action. 
 
 The ammunition supply of troops on the firing-line is supple- 
 mented by the ammunition collected from the dead and wounded. 
 Company commanders are charged with this duty. The major 
 orders the issue of the extra ammunition. 
 
 These combat wagons, when empty, immediately return to the 
 rear, refill, and then move forward, halt under cover, and endeavor 
 to locate their battalion, inform its commander where they are, and 
 await orders. They are not part of the regimental train, and are 
 not supposed to be used for any other purpose. The company hand- 
 litters are carried on them when going into action. It is forbidden 
 to place any other articles on these wagons. 
 
140 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Remember that troops going into action cannot expect to have 
 that day more ammunition than they can carry into the action with 
 them, supplemented by that collected from the dead and wounded . 
 
 The combat wagons, unless otherwise ordered by higher au- 
 thority, march directly in rear of their battalion. 
 
 LECTURE No. 6. 
 THE ATTACK. 
 
 Modem combat requires the highest order of training, disci- 
 pline, leladership, and morale on the part of the infantry. Compli- 
 cated maneuvers are impracticable. Efficient leadership and a 
 determination to win by simple and direct methods must be de- 
 pended upon for success. 
 
 The duties of infantry are many and difficult. All infantry 
 must be fit to cope with all conditions that may. arise. Modern 
 war requires but one kind of infantry — good infantry. In local 
 combats, which make up the general battle, the better endurance, 
 use of ground, fire efficiency, discipline, and training will win. It is 
 the duty of the infantry to win the local successes which enable the 
 commanding general to win the battle. 
 
 The successful advance of one company allows the battalion 
 to advance; the advance of the battalion lets the regiment forward; 
 the advance of the regiment lets the brigade forward; and this in 
 turn lets the division advance, pierce the enemy's line, and thus 
 win the battle. You can thus see the responsibihty which rests up- 
 on the company commander. One company may win or lose a bat- 
 tle by the maimer in which it is handled. 
 
 Infantry must be trained to expect and bear the heaviest losses 
 in combat and on the march without becoming discouraged. It is 
 your work. Play the game for all it is worth. Good infantry can 
 defeat an enemy greatly superior in numbers, but lacking in training, 
 discipUne, and morale. 
 
 After the mechanism of extended order drill has been learned 
 with precision in the company, every exercise should be, as far as 
 practicable, in the nature of a maneuver (combat exercise) against 
 an imaginary outlined or represented enemy. Company extended 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 141 
 
 order drill may be conducted without reference to a tactical situa- 
 tion, but a combat exercise, whatever the si^e of the unit employed, 
 should be conducted under an assumed tactical situation. 
 
 Self-reliance, initiative, aggressiveness, and a conception of 
 team-work constitute the fundamental characteristics of successful 
 leadership. 
 
 A good plan, once adopted and put into execution, should not be 
 abandoned, unless it becomes clear that it cannot succeed. After- 
 thoughts are dangerous, except as they aid in the execution of the 
 original plan. 
 
 Combats that do not promise success or some real advantage 
 to the general plan should be avoided. Don't fight just for the 
 sake of fighting. 
 
 Complicated maneuvers are not likely to succeed in war. 
 
 Officers must show themselves true leaders. They must exact 
 of their troops the strictest discipline on the battle-field. Lax dis- 
 cipline and slipshod methods will never succeed. 
 
 Constant efforts must be made to spare the troops all unnec- 
 essary hardship and fatigue, so as to conserve their energies for the 
 supreme test. 
 
 A commander takes full and direct charge of the firing-line 
 only when the line has absorbed his entire command. 
 
 Commanders should tell their subordinates what they want 
 done, but not how it is to be done. If you can't trust the man to 
 do the work, detail someone else. 
 
 Subordinates must be loyal to their commanders and strive in 
 every way to carry out their wishes. A great deal of latitude is 
 necessarily allowed subordinates, but this must not become license 
 on their part. 
 
 Remember, when the men of two or more units intermingle on 
 the firing-line, all officers and men immediately submit to the senior. 
 
 Officers and platoon guides seek to fill vacancies caused by 
 casualties. Each seizes any opportunity to exercise the fimctions 
 consistent with his grade, and all assist in the maintenance of order 
 and control. 
 
 Any officer or non-commissioned officer who becomes sep- 
 arated from his proper unit and cannot rejoin it must at once place 
 
142 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 himself and his command at the disposal of the nearest higher com- 
 mander. Remember, this is team-work, and team-work is what 
 wins. 
 
 Soldiers must be taught the necessity of remaining with their 
 companies, but those who become detached must join the nearest 
 company and serve with it until the battle is over or reorganization 
 is ordered. 
 
 Long-range fire is permissible in pursuit on account of the moral 
 effect of any fire under the circumstances; at other times it is of 
 doubtful value. 
 
 In attack, the desire to open fire when losses are first felt must 
 be repressed. The attack which halts to open fire at long ranges 
 will seldom succeed. You should endeavor to work up to within 800 
 yards before opening fire — 1,000 yards at most. 
 
 The men must be impressed with the fact that, having made a 
 considerable advance under fire and having been checked, it is sui- 
 cidal to turn back in dayUght. You must stay where you are until 
 supported or until you can retire under cover of darkness. 
 
 Confidence in their ability to use the bayonet gives the attacking 
 troops the promise of success. Remember, only the offensive wins. 
 
 The best protection from the enemy's fire is a well-directed and 
 delivered fire from your own line. 
 
 Always keep out a formed reserve and don't throw it in until 
 the charge is ordered. 
 
 Thirty rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be 
 held as a reserve to be expended only when ordered by an officer. 
 Men continue to fire until they get down to this reserve, when they 
 cease firing. If asKed why they are not firing, they report that they 
 are down to the reserve thirty rounds. 
 
 Men are never sent back from the firing-line for ammu"nition , 
 Men sent forward with ammunition remain with the firing-line. 
 
 At the formation of the company, squads and platoons are 
 designated. These assignments and designations are never changed 
 in battle. Losses in the platoon are filled from the officers and non- 
 commissioned officers of the platoon or from reinforcements arriving 
 on the firing-line. A reinforcement of less than a platoon has little 
 value. It will be avoided. The original platoon divisions of the 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 143 
 
 companies in the firing-line should be maintained and should not be 
 broken up by the mingling of reinforcements. 
 
 Men joining the firing-Une should go forward, when a rush is 
 ordered, with the men on their right. 
 
 In general, the company when acting alone, is employed accord- 
 ing to the principles applicable to the battalion; the captain using 
 his platoons like the major uses his companies, making due allow- 
 ance for the difference in strength. 
 
 Five or six officers and men, selected from the most accurate 
 estimaters in the company, are designated as range-finders, and are 
 specially trained in estimating distances. 
 
 Volley firing has limited application. In defense it may be 
 used in the early stages of an action, if the enemy presents a large, 
 compact target. It may be used to get the range if the strike of the 
 bullets can be observed. It may be used by troops using fire of 
 position and supporting the attack. 
 
 Fire at will is the class of fire usually employed in attack and 
 defense. 
 
 Clip fire has limited application. It is principally used: (1) 
 In the early stages of the action to steady the men by habituating 
 them to brief pauses in the firing; (2) to produce a short burst of fire. 
 
 All parts of the target are of equal importance. Care must be 
 exercised that the men do not slight its less visible parts to fire at a 
 part that can be plainly seen. A section of the target not covered 
 by fire represents a section of the enemy's line which you are per- 
 mitting to fire with peace-time accuracy. 
 
 Troops must get used to the idea that they must learn to shoot 
 at a locality, and not at a visible target. If the enemy knows how to 
 play the game, you won't see him at all; that is why you must shoot 
 at the place where he is most likely to be. 
 
 In combat the platoon is the fire unit. 
 
 The more effective the fire to which the enemy is subjected the 
 less effective will be his fire and the less you will suffer from his fire 
 in consequence. 
 
 The distance between the firing-line and the supporting group 
 or groups will vary between wide limits. When cover is available, 
 the support can be as close as 50 to 100 yards; when such cover is 
 
144 COMPANY TRAINING {INFANTRY). 
 
 not available, it should not be closer than 300 yards; it may be as 
 far as 500 yards in rear, if good cover is available and is not ob- 
 tainable at a lesser distance. But it is where it can support the line 
 most effectively; remember that. 
 
 The safety of the men is of a secondary consideration. If the 
 safety of the men were the only consideration, leave them off the 
 battle-field, and then no one would get hurt. 
 
 In the absence of express directions from the major, each cap- 
 tain of a flank company determines when an advance by rushes will 
 be attempted. This company will then become the base company, 
 and the other units must conform to its advance. 
 
 The major or senior officer on the firing-hne determines when 
 bayonets shall be fixed and gives the signal. The Bulgarians in the 
 late war habitually fixed bayonets at about 600 yards, and this 
 seems to be a good rule to follow. The support always fixes bayonets 
 when the firing-line does. 
 
 The commander of the firing-line determines when the charge 
 shall be made — subject, of course, to control of higher commanders. 
 When the charge has commenced, all troops must join in it. 
 
 When officers or men belonging to the fighting troops leave 
 their proper places to carry back or care for the wounded, they are 
 guilty of skulking. This offense must be repressed with the utmost 
 rigor. 
 
 An envelopment of both flanks should never be attempted 
 without a very decided superiority of numbers. 
 
 Officers, platoon leaders, guides, and musicians are equipped 
 with whistles. Company commanders have a whistle of a different 
 tone from those used by the platoon commanders, guides, and 
 musicians. 
 
 Should the major (in battalion) or the captain (in company) 
 fail to order out combat pajt;rols, it is the business of the captains of 
 flank companies, or lieutenants of flank platoons, to send them out. 
 Do not forget this. 
 
 I believe that the best formation for a company or battalion to 
 assume in deliveriiig an attack is to form in four echelons. Place 
 one company in the firing-line, two in support about 300 yards in 
 rear and uncovering each flank, and one company in support (re- 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 145 
 
 serve) about 500 yards in rear of the center or in rear of the exposed 
 flank. The company would, of course, place platoons where the 
 major uses companies. The firing-line should be deployed at about 
 four paces interval, the supporting echelons at two paces interval , 
 and the support directly in rear (third line) at one pace interval. 
 If this formation is assumed, your flanks are secure, because the 
 supports in rear of the flanks can change front (platoon, right or 
 left) to meet the unexpected attack. 
 
 You can reinforce the firing-line by coming up on a flank or by 
 thickening the line already formed. You have sufficient strength 
 in reay also. The firing-line can be prolonged with facility to the 
 right or left, as desired. 
 
 You do not commit too many men to the action at first until 
 you know where you want the attack to be delivered. 
 
 See diagram on following page. 
 
 Don't forget your combat patrols — ^well out on the flank and 
 slightly in advance of the firing-line; never in rear of it. 
 
 The platoon guide is on the left of the platoon commander 
 when the platoon is deployed and at a halt; when advancing, the 
 platoon commander is in front of his platoon and the platoon guide 
 is in rear of it. The platoon guide watches the company com- 
 mander for signals. The platoon commander must watch the 
 platoon and receive signals from the company commander through 
 his guide. 
 
 When the company deploys, the first sergeant (unless in com- 
 mand of a platoon) and the two company musicians immediately 
 join the captain and remain with him unless he sends them elsewhere . 
 
 Losses in the platoon are filled from the officers and non- 
 commissioned officers of the platoon and from those arriving with 
 reinforcing troops. 
 
 The original squad and platoon divisions in the firing-line must 
 be preserved, and must not be broken up by the arrival of reinforcing 
 troops. The original squad divisions may later contain enough men 
 to make it advisable to handle it as a platoon, in which case new 
 squads may be created. 
 
 It is the business of all officers and sergeants to continually 
 
146 
 
 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 
 
 c3 
 
 is 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 
 -sp^ 
 
 ooc - - 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 - -s 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 
 --- 
 
 -•spi^ 
 
 009 --- 
 
 
 spiC 005 
 
 ,^ 
 
 
 o >; 
 
 Cu CO 
 
 C/2 pt^ 
 
 >5^ 
 
 _Q 03 
 
 o 
 Q 
 
 c3 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY), 147 
 
 keep the line organized and under control. The appoint new squad 
 leaders, etc., when necessary. 
 
 Every opportunity and lull in the fight must be utilized to the 
 utmost to reorganize the line, create new squads and platoons, and 
 appoint new leaders to take the place of those lost in action. 
 
 LECTURE No. 7. 
 THE DEFENSE. 
 
 Only the offensive wins, but there are times when it is abso- 
 lutely necessary for troops to act on the defensive. 
 
 Frequently in war it will be impossibe to attack with new or 
 untrained troops, because they lack the ability to maneuver. 
 Troops that<Jannot maneuver are totally unfit for the attack. 
 
 One of the most potent causes of the defeat of Turkey in her 
 late war with Bulgaria was the lack of ability to maneuver. The 
 Turkish troops, when once deployed and placed in positic>n, had to 
 stay there. The Bulgarians, on the other hand, being highly 
 trained, could just draw circles around them and hit them when and 
 where they pleased. It is a very good thing for a soldier to know 
 how to shoot, but he has got to know how to maneuver also or you 
 can^t place him where you want him and get the best out of his 
 abiUty to use the rifle. Even on the defense it is frequently nec- 
 essary for troops to maneuver, in order to meet flank attacks, etc . 
 
 The first requisite of a good defensive position is a free field of 
 fire in its front and flanks. The flanks should rest on some natural 
 obstacle which will render them secure from being turned — a, swamp , 
 a lake, a large river, or a mountain, for example. The next thing is 
 that there must be no commanding ground within good rifle range, 
 which the enemy might occupy and enfilade your line. There must 
 be good means of communication between all parts of your line. A 
 position for defense in which you r line is sei)arated by a lake, a river, 
 a hill, or a deep ravine is faulty. Half of your line may be defeated 
 before the other half can come to its assistance. 
 
 Troops on the defensive always intrench. New troops donH 
 like the fatigue incident to this, but the officers must insist upon it 
 and see that it is done. New troops frequently fail to appreciate 
 
148 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 the advantage of intrenchments, and will almost invariably slight 
 the work if not carefully watched. Intrenchments are of no value 
 unless properly constructed. It is manifest that if the minimum 
 thickness of earth required to stop a bullet is 2}^ feet, it is folly to 
 throw up a parapet 1}^ feet thick; but this is just what new troops 
 will do if you do not watch them. After they have been in service 
 for some time, they learn the value of intrenchments and will con- 
 struct them properly of their own accord, but they won't do it at 
 first. They are prone to throw away their intrenching tools in 
 preference to carrying them; this you must also watch. You will 
 be sorry some day if you don't. 
 
 Another thing: in choosing a defensive position, occupy one that 
 the enemy cannot avoid, but must attack or give up his mission. 
 If you take up a position on some hill that* the enemy can avoid by 
 marching around it and then proceeding on his mission, what have 
 you accomplished? Nothing. If he knows his business and can 
 accomplish his mission without attacking, he certainly will not 
 attack you simply because you are there. 
 
 Deployment for the Defense. 
 
 To a certain extent the rules laid down for deployment in the at- 
 tack hold good in the deployment for the defense, although it is per- 
 missible to place more men in the firing-Une at the commencement of 
 a defensive action than in the attack; but you must be careful not 
 to commit all your men to the action until you are sure just where 
 the attack is going to be deUvered. Remember, troops under fire 
 can do only one of two things — advance or retire. If you deploy 
 too many men at first, and the enemy attacks from a different di- 
 rection, you, not having supports to throw into the line where 
 needed, will have to withdraw part of the firing-line to the rear, as- 
 semble them, and then deploy them in the new direction — a very 
 dehcate operation and one not to be attempted with new troops. 
 It is much safer to deploy a thin line at first, covering the desired 
 front, to make the enemy disclose his intentions, and then, when 
 you are sure that you know where he is going to attack, strengthen 
 your line where needed. 
 
 Always keep out a formed reserve as long as possible. When you 
 throw in your last man, you can no longer influence the action or 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 149 
 
 meet unexpected developments. In general, don't throw in your 
 lagt reserve until the enemy is preparing to charge. Of course, there 
 may be exceptions to this rule, but it is a good one to follow. Na - 
 poleon said: ^* There is no dogmatic rule in war/' 
 
 Don't rely on fire action alone to stop the charge; you must be 
 prepared to stop the enemy with the jbayonet if your fire doesn't 
 stop him. Teach your men this and impress them with this fact. 
 
 The distance of the sup'ports from the firing-line, on the de- 
 fensive, will depend entirely upon circumstances. They should be 
 as close to the firing-line as possible, provided they can secure good 
 cover, so as not to suffer from the enemy's fire. If natural cover is 
 not available, you will have to construct artificial cover (trenches). 
 If there is no natural cover for the reserve available and there is not 
 time to construct cover, it is better to throw the supports into the 
 firing-line at once than to allow them to be exposed to losses without 
 being able to inflict corresponding losses upon the enemy. 
 
 When deploying for defense, sections of the line must be as- 
 signed to units, companies, or platoons, and they are charged with 
 the duty of covering this section. 
 
 The range is estimated to objects in the front (measured pref- 
 erably, if time permits), so that the defense will know the correct 
 range from time to time as the enemy advances. For example: we 
 have a small creek in our front; we find that the range to it is 750 
 yards. Good. When the enemy arrives at the creek, we know ex- 
 actly what the range is and can in consequence open an effective 
 fire upon him. Having found the range to different objects in your 
 front in a like manner, you should be able to keep the enemy under 
 an effective fire during his entire advance. 
 
 Where important dead space lies in front of one section, an ad- 
 joining section should be instructed to cover it with fire when nec- 
 essary, or machine guns should be concealed for like purpose. 
 
 Advanced posts or any form of unnecessary dispersion should 
 be avoided. 
 
 Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if the result is worth 
 the cost. The defense of the Li^ge forts is a good example. 
 
 When the line to be occupied is somewhat extended for the 
 number of troops which are to occupy it, it is better to leave gaps in 
 
150 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 line, between subdivisions, than to attempt to cover up the entire 
 line by a continuous thin skirmish-line. Your fire, if properly 
 distributed, should be as effective, and you avoid undue dispersion 
 and consequent loss of control. 
 I will illustrate what I mean. 
 
 Defensive Line. 
 
 gap gap 
 
 Platoon Platoon Platoon 
 
 • Support 
 
 Remember, in the defense as well as in the attack you must 
 assign a sector of the front to each subdivision, which it must cover 
 with its fire. Make use of natural objects in your front to define 
 the limits of the sectors of fire assigned to subdivisions. These 
 objects may be a white house, a lone pine tree, a stream, a pecuUar 
 colored rock, etc. This is absolutely essential to provide for the 
 entire front being covered by fire. 
 
 Your men must be taught to aim and fire as carefully at the 
 crest of a line of hills, a grove of trees, or at a fence as they would if 
 firing at a well-defined and clearly-seen target. Remember, in war 
 you will rarely see the enemy. You must learn to shoot at ajocality. 
 
 A section of the e^nemy's line not covered with fire is a sec- 
 tion that is shooting with peace-time accuracy. You cannot stop 
 an advance that is shooting like this. In the attack you cannot ad- 
 vance against a fine that is delivering a fire of this kind. You must 
 obtain superiority of fire before you can advance or before you can 
 stop an advance, of the enemy against your line. You will never 
 be able to secure superiority of fire unless the target is carefully 
 divided among your subdivisions, and each one covers its sector 
 with a well-directed and delivered fire. 
 
 You have all heard much about fire discipline. There is no 
 such thing as fire discipline. What you must continually strive for 
 is discipline — discipUne on the march, discipline in camp, and dis- 
 cipline everywhere and all the time. T^en, and not till then, will 
 you have discipline on the battle-field. When you have this, you 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 151 
 
 will have fire discipline, and not before. If your men are not disci- 
 plined in camp, they will not by some magical change acquire it on 
 the battle-field, and you will not be able to control your fire, through 
 lack of discipline. Discipline means absolute control over your men 
 at all times. Strive for it and work for it continually. Your com- 
 mand is worthless without it. 
 
 The supply of ammunition will usually be more plentiful on 
 the defensive than, when you are attacking, but this fact will not 
 relieve you from the responsibility of carefully watching the ex- 
 penditure of ammunition. Officers, sergeants, and especially cor- 
 porals, must watch this continually. 
 
 Remember, it is the number of hits that are made that counts, 
 and not the number of rounds that are fired. A bullet that hits 
 3 feet in front of the line and one that goes about 6 inch6s over a 
 man's head have the approximate value of hits, because the man 
 who hears or sees this bullet will not be quite as cool as he was 
 before and his fire will not be as well directed as it was before . 
 There will always be a suspicion in his mind that perhaps the next 
 bullet may not hit in front of the line or go over his head. 
 
 You can frequently gain superiority of fire without hitting a 
 man, if your fire is pretty close to the other fellow. When his fire 
 begins to get wild from this cause, his bullets will go higher and 
 higher over your line, and the morale of your men will increase 
 proportionally. Under these circumstances it will not be long 
 before your line begins to make hits. 
 
 Watch your flanks continually. They are specially vulnerable 
 in defense, uhless resting upon natural impassable obstacles. One 
 platoon on the flahk of a regiment will cause the entire line to 
 fall back. 
 
 At the battle of Gravelotte, in the Franco-Prussian War of 1870, 
 the fire of one Prussian company of 250 men caused a whole French 
 division to fall back from a pbsition that they had successfully held 
 all day against a Prussian corps, attacking them in front. A good 
 disposition is to place your supports in rear of tlie flanks to guard 
 against this very maneuver; they can usually meet a flank attack 
 by changing front. Remember, you can't change the front of your 
 firing-line except in very small commands. 
 
152 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 Counter Attacks. 
 
 Counter attacks are nearly always necessary, but it is very 
 dangerous to attempt them with troops that are not very well drilled 
 and disciplined. You must have excellent control over your line 
 before they can even be attempted. Napoleon said : "The passage 
 from the defensive to the offensive is one of the most difficult 
 operations in war.*' 
 
 I would not advise new troops to attempt counter attacks unless 
 made with a fraction of the line, or with supports or reserves, which 
 have not been engaged. 
 
 Combat Patrols. 
 
 Don't forget your combat patrols. They must be used in de- 
 fense as well as in the attack, and in this case they are of eqbal 
 importance. They must be well out on the flanks. 
 
 The withdrawal from action might be properly taken up in 
 connection with the defensive, but I prefer to devote a special 
 lecture to this subject later. 
 
 LECTURE No. 8. 
 INTRENCHING AND INTRENCHMENTS. 
 
 The history of all modern wars has been that at the com- 
 mencement the troops do not take kindly to the pick and shovel 
 until they have learned through bitter experience and severe losses 
 that the pick and shovel are quite as impbrtant and valuable as the 
 rifle and bayonet. You must therefore insist that your men retain 
 the field intrenching tools to the end. Your officers and sergeants 
 must impress this fact upon your men at every opportunity. 
 
 Colonel Carl Reichmann, U. S. Army, military attache to the 
 Russian Army during the Russian-Japanese War, says in his report: 
 '* It may be truthfully said of the Russians, and probably of the Jap- 
 anese also, that when they do not fight or march, they dig.'' 
 
 Colonel J. F. Morrison, U. S. Army, military attache to the Jap- 
 anese Army in the Russian-Japanese War, says in his report on the 
 war: " Great reliance was placed on field intrenchments and their use 
 was very general. Once in the presence of the enemy, the intrench- 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 153 
 
 ing tool seemed next in importance to the rifle and ammunition, 
 'nie rule on both sides seemed to be to always cover their positions 
 with intrenchments as soon as taken up, even when held only for a 
 short time." 
 
 This is expert testimony from eye-witnesses. 
 
 Our own troops in the Civil War learned this lesson well, and 
 became expert iii the use of the pick and shovel. 
 
 The Bulgarians in their late war with Turkey were experts in the 
 use of intrenchments, and the fact that the Turks were careless and 
 ignorant in this respect had not a little to do with their defeat. 
 
 Method of Locating Trenches. 
 
 Deploy a thin skirmish-line, with five-pace intervals, and move 
 them forward to the position that it is desired to intrench. Have 
 the men then halt and He down. Cause each man to crawl forward 
 or back until he finds a place from which he can command all of the 
 ground to his front, being careful to see that there are no hollows 
 in which an enemy might conceal himself and thus be safe from fire. 
 Space of this kind is knoWn as "dead space." 
 
 Trenches should never be located on the crest of a hill, as it 
 brings them into relief against the sky-line, which renders them a 
 good target and enables the enemy to locate them easily. Th^ best 
 place is usually some distance in advance of the true crest and at a 
 point from which all of the ground towards the enemy can be cov- 
 ered by fire. This place is known as the "military crest." Have 
 the men then mark this line with their bayonets or preferably with 
 sticks or pfegs; this will be the trace of your work, and you will find 
 that, with rare exceptions, this line will not be straight, but will 
 follow the contour of the ground. The line having been marked, 
 commence work on the trenches, and be careful to see that the 
 men follow the line of stakes. 
 
 Sometimes it will be impossible to so locate your line that all 
 dead space will be covered without advancing your line too far to 
 the front and thus having weak angles in it. In this case it will be 
 necessary to have the dead spaces covered by some flank section of 
 the line, and the troops occupying them will be instructed to care- 
 fully observe these dead spaces and cover them with fire when nee- 
 
154 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 essary. Machine guns, carefully concealed, are specially valuable 
 in this respect. 
 
 Usually infantry trenches are laid out in company lengths. 
 Remember that, except in permanent fortification, infantry plans 
 and constructs the trenches that it is to occupy. 
 
 With the intrenching tools carried by the infantry soldier troops 
 can qujickly throw up a low parapet about 3 feet thick that will 
 furnish corisiderable cover against rifle fire, but scarcely any against 
 shrapnel fire. This form of trench is frequently of great value to^ 
 the attack that is temporarily unable to continue its advance. 
 
 The best form of trench is a deep narrow standing trench, with 
 parapet about 1 foot high and about 5 feet thick. This trench 
 futTiisl^s excellent cover against artillery an d rifle fire, and should 
 be used as much as possible. 
 
 Trenches should always be concealed by placing sod, grass, 
 brufeh, or weeds on top of the parapet to make them look as much 
 as possible like the surrounding ground. Don't neglect this very 
 simple precaution. 
 
 Intrenchments enable a commander to hold a position with the 
 least number of men and to prolong his line or increase his reserve . 
 They are constructed with a view to giving cover which will di- 
 minish losses, but they must not be so built or placed as to interfere 
 with the free use of the rifle. Fire effect is the first consideration , 
 
 An excellent form of trench, and one much used by the Spanish 
 troops in our late war, was a deep narrow trench without any 
 parapet. In this case the earth excavated from the trench must 
 be carried away from the trench and scattered, preferably to the 
 rear. This trench, of course, requires more time to construct. 
 
 Trenches should be made as comfortable as time permits, 
 special attention being paid to drainage. 
 
 Returns or pockets should be constructed for the rears, first-aid 
 stations, ammunition, rations, etc. 
 
 When trenches are constructed for the supports in rear, it will 
 be necessary to construct trenches from them to the firing-trench, 
 so that the supports can reinforce the firing-line without exposing 
 themselves. These are caUed "communicating trenches." Theses 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 155 
 
 trenches should be constructed in a zigzag or obUque form to escape 
 b^ng enfiladed by the enemy's fire directed at the firing- trench. 
 
 Dummy trenches are frequently of value to draw the enemy's 
 fire and attention and thus protect the true trench. 
 
 Officers must remember that the trace and profile of trenches 
 are simple matters compared with their correct location and use. 
 Effect of Weapons. 
 
 The rifle and machine gun shoot a bullet whose penetration in 
 earth varies, according to the arm, the distance, and the nature of 
 the soil, from 24 to 40 inches; this last penetration hardly applies 
 except to clay at very short ranges; 32 inches can be considered as 
 the normal maximum. 
 
 Shrapnel from field guns fired with a time-fuse has no effect 
 upon intrenchments which have a sufficient thickness to resist a 
 rifle bullet. It can only have effect upon the defenders when the 
 latter are firing. It is powerless when the men are resting behind . 
 the parapet, either seated or lying down with their backs to the mass 
 or protected by it under the slope of about 1 on 4. It is usual, in 
 indicating the slope of intrenchments, to use this method — that is , 
 1 on 4, 6 on 1, etc., meaning a vertical elevation of 1 foot on a hori- 
 zontal base of 4, or a vertical elevation of 6 on a horizontal base of 
 1, etc., thus: 
 
 ^ 
 
 The same shell fired with a percussion fuse penetrates rather 
 deeply into the earth of a recently constructed parapet when the 
 projectile falls upon the exterior slope. Upon bursting it may form 
 craters as large as 60 inches in diameter and 20 inches in depth. 
 But when the projectile falls upon the superior slope, it cuts out a 
 furrow of not more than 6 or 8 inches in depth at the most, and 
 carries awky but little earth; in other words, it ricochets. Such 
 shells fired against men placed upon the banquette of an intrench- 
 
156 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 ment produce but little effect. At 2,000 yards it can hardly be 
 hoped to get more than one man wounded for each shell, even with 
 a perfectly regulated fire. If the men are seated or lying down with 
 their backs to the parapet, the result is practically nothing. That 
 is one of the reasons why you cannot shoot an enemy out of a posi- 
 tion; that is also why you have to launch your infantry attack 
 against the trenches to make the enemy man the parapet so as to 
 give you an opportunity to hammer him with your artillery. 
 
 Good troops fear artillery fire very little, if they are in proper 
 formation. They say; "It makes a hell of a noise and scares 
 recruits." But may the Lord help you if they catch you in column 
 or in any compact formation. The burial squad will be very, 
 very busy. 
 
 You can see from the above discussion that your trenches must 
 be narrow and deep, with a low, gradual-sloping parapet to make 
 the shells ricochet off and to make them inconspicuous. 
 
 The lying-down trench offers concealment, but no cover from 
 shrapnel fire. It has been found by experiment that a man prone 
 offers just as much target to shrapnel fire as one standing. He 
 converts his target into a horizontal one instead of a vertical one 
 without diminishing it. The usefulness of the prone trench is lim- 
 ited to infantry on the offensive which has been checked and must 
 hold out under the enemy^s fire. In this case any form of cover is 
 valuable, but this trench should be deepened as soon as possible. 
 This may be done under fire. 
 
 Colonel Carl Reichmann, U, S. Army, says in his report on the 
 Japanese-Russian War: "Whenever practicable, the standing trench 
 was employed, as being the best protection against shrapnel fire. 
 The kneeling trench was not employed unless lack of time or the 
 character of the ground made the standing trench impracticable. 
 The lying-down trench I never saw." 
 
 I will now illustrate different forms of trenches, which you gen- 
 tlemen will find in the Infantry Drill Regulations, Field Service 
 Regulations, and the book "AppUed Principles of Field Fortifica- 
 tions for Line Officers." Every officer in the Guard should have a 
 copy of the latter book. The former books you, of course, have. 
 
 This lecture is not complete by any means, but I don't want to 
 give you too much all at once, or you won't get any of it. 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 157 
 
 
 'o6e^ai^cc^ 
 
 Different Forms of Trenches. 
 
158 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 LECTURE No. 9. 
 DEFENSE OF HOUSES AND LOCALITIES. 
 
 When on the defensive with comparatively large commands, 
 such as a regiment or brigade, it is rarely necessary to prepare for 
 attack from more than one direction, or, let us say, your line would 
 be prepared to receive an attack over an arc of about 90 or 100 de- 
 grees; This kind of a defensive position was pretty thoroughly cov- 
 ered in Lecture No. 7, which you have already heard. In the de- 
 fense of houses and localities, however, this rule would not hold 
 good, and you must prepare a house, a farm, a small village, or a hill 
 for all-around defense. These positions are usually so small (com - 
 paratively) that they are easily turned; hence the necessity for 
 all-around defense. 
 
 An isolated position of this nature would have to be prepared 
 for all-around attack, so some of the trenches and emplacements 
 (if you have artillery or machine guns) would be required to face 
 to the rear, and care would have to be taken to avoid the possibiUty 
 of receiving fire in reverse. Shelters for the reserves would be nec- 
 essary in some central part of the position, and these should be bomb- 
 proof, if possible and artillery fire is expected. In any case they 
 should be well concealed. Shelters for supplies, ammunition, etc., 
 would be necessary, and the important question of water supply 
 must be carefully considered and provided for. The position se- 
 lected for defense would not in such a case necessarily contain 
 within itself the object to be defended. It would hardly ever be 
 possible to find a position that could be defended with a small force 
 immediately around the object, if the latter were a bridge, railway 
 station, water-tank, ford, etc.; it would usually be sufficient if the 
 position commanded the object and approaches at short range. 
 Sometimes it might be necessary to make the defense in the form of 
 two positions supporting each other and both commanding the 
 object. 
 
 If the enemy is uncivilized or unprovided with artillery, it is 
 evidently unnecessary to emploj;* the elaborate methods necessary 
 against civiliZicd enemies. Protection against rifle bullets is easily 
 obtained, and neither concealment nor overhead cover are in such 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 159 
 
 cases necessary. Block-houses and villages, or strong buildings, 
 make good defensible positions in these cases. 
 
 For a fortified post in a savage or semi-civilizjed country a 
 mafterial obstacle is generally essential; so if the work itself does not 
 provide one in the form of a wall or stockade, a strong, independent 
 one in the shape of barbed-wire entanglements or abatis should be 
 provided. A clear field of fire is, of course, imperative, and flank 
 defense should be provided, dead angles being inadmissible. Every 
 fort of this nature should be self-contained; that is, it should con- 
 tain room for storage of supplies and ammunition and should be 
 possessed of its own water supply. 
 
 We will first take up the preparation of houses for defense, and 
 later localities. When selecting a house for defense, if there is any 
 choice in the matter, select one that is cross-shaped, or at least has 
 wings. A cross-shaped house is valuable, because there are no 
 dead angles anywhere; every part of the front is well covered with 
 fire. The doors in such houses are usually located in the re-entrant 
 angles (between the arms), and are easily defended in consequence. 
 
 If it is not possible to secure a house in the form of a cross, the 
 next best shape is one with wings or outbuildings. These, when 
 fortified, will provide for the defense of dead angles and the flanks. 
 
 A perfectly square house is objectionable, because you have 
 four dead angles — one at each corner. Some provision will have 
 to be made to cover these dead angles with fire. This may be done 
 by constructing sunken block-houses outside of the building, with a 
 communicating trench from the house to the block-house. 
 
 Houses which have flat roofs are preferable to those having 
 slanting roofs, because a parapet can be constructed around the flat 
 roof by using sand-bags or boxes filled with earth, etc., and this will 
 give another tier of fire and greater command. 
 
 The ideal house for defense is one constructed of adobe. The 
 ^alls will stop bullets, and shells going through will make a com- 
 paratively small hole. 
 
 The next best material would be reinforced concrete, then 
 stone and brick. The disadvantage of brick and stone houses is 
 that when a shell strikes them it knocks out stones and bricks, 
 which become projectiles. However, they stop rifle bullets. 
 
160 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 The poorest house for defense is one built of wood. It will 
 rarely stop high-power bullets, offers no protection against shrapnel 
 and shells, and there is always the great danger of fire. 
 
 Galvanized ^iron roofs are the best, although they offer com- 
 paratively little resistance to rifle bullets or shrapnel, and none 
 against shell. However, when struck there is nothing to fall, and 
 frequently a percussion shell will go through without exploding. 
 
 A tile roof is the least desirable. . It is always heavy, the tiles 
 frequently become projectiles when struck, and there is always the 
 danger of the roof falUng in on you. 
 
 Plank roofs covered with rubberoid or similar material are 
 dangerous on account of splinters. 
 
 Shingle roofs are bad on account of the danger of fire, but there 
 is little danger here from splinters. 
 
 An adobe house, then, with a galvani/ed iron roof, would be the 
 ideal house for defense. However, you will have to make the best 
 of what you have and take your chances. 
 
 In preparing a house for defense, first remove all window frames 
 and glass to avoid the danger of splinters, then sand-bag or blanket 
 the windows. (To blanket a window, cut loop-holes in a blanket 
 and nail it over the window. This is done to prevent the enemy 
 from seeing what is going on inside of the house and to prevent the 
 enemy from seeing persons who may pass the windows. It, of 
 course, offers no protection against fire, but is valuable in that it 
 conceals you from the enemy.) Close and barricade all doors 
 (leaving one for entrance and exit) by stacking up sand-bags behind 
 them, or boxes filled with earth, bedding, etc. If artillery fire is 
 feared, shear up all floors with timbers and cover them with 3 or 4 
 inches of earth to prevent sphntering. Provide barrels with water , 
 in the cellar or on the ground floor preferably, and if the house is 
 one that will not stop bullets, pile sand-bags around the barrels to 
 prevent them from being pierced by rifle bullets and thus losing 
 your water. Provide rations, medical supplies, ammunition, etc. 
 Sand-bags will have to be piled around your reserve ammunition 
 if there is danger of its being struck by shells or bullets. 
 
 Construct trenches outside of the building. These should be 
 held first, and you should not retreat into the building except as a 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 161 
 
 last resort. I would not place trenches more than 50 yards from 
 the quilding or closer than 50 feet. 
 
 Set aside a place in the building for a hospital, and rears should 
 be provided outside and inside of the building; the one inside not 
 to be used except in the last extremity. 
 
 A covered way or communicating trench should connect the 
 building with the outside trenches. 
 
 If fire is feared in the roof, wet it or cover it with blankets 
 soaked in water. 
 
 No cooking or fires should be allowed in the building during an 
 attack. If fires are going in the building when the attack com- 
 mences, immediately put them out with water, and be sure that 
 they are out. 
 
 Every man of the garrison should have a station to which he 
 would repair in case of an alarm, and he should clearly understand 
 just what he should do and what is expected of him. 
 
 An officer or non-commissioned officer should be placed in 
 charge of the different parts of the house and the detachment which 
 is to defend that part, and should clfearly understand what he is to do . 
 
 Always keep a small reserve, to be under the orders of the 
 commanding officer only. 
 
 Ranges should be measured to natural objects outside of the 
 house, so that you can keep the attacking troops under an effective 
 fire. 
 
 Don't hesitate to sacrifice the command, if the object to be 
 obtained is worth the cost. 
 
 If time permits and the material is available, obstacles can b e 
 constructed in front of your trenches, using barbed- wire entangle- 
 ments, broken bottles, and, in fact, any material that will delay or 
 embarrass the enemy's advance. 
 
 In the PhiUppines we made a most effective obstacle by placing 
 a belt of broken beer-bottles stood on end, about 4 feet wide, in 
 front of houses or trenches which it was necessary to defend. This 
 belt of broken glass has stopped many a charge and has enabled 
 many a small garrison to resist successfully an attack that otherwise 
 would have been pushed home. It cuts their feet all to pieces, and 
 troops simply cannot charge over it. 
 
162 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 An excellent method of using barbed wire, and one much em- 
 ployed by the Spaniards, is to unreel four or five lines of barbed 
 wire in the grass, without fastening them to stakes or anything; 
 these Unes should be about 3 feet apart. In charging over this 
 obstacle, some man is sure to get his foot caught in a strand of wire ; 
 this raises it and, of course, everyone else immediately gets hung up 
 in it. The wire must be concealed in the grass, so that it will not be 
 seen until the troops get right on it. 
 
 High and low wire entanglements are, of course, formidable, 
 but they require a certain amount of skilled labor and require con- 
 siderable time to construct properly. 
 
 Planks filled with spikes, small pits with a sharp stick at the 
 bottom, and many other forms of obstacles may be constructed, but 
 ordinarily they would only be used in semi-permanent fortifications, 
 on account of the time, material, and skilled labor required, so I 
 will not deal with them here. 
 
 In defending a village, employ the same principles that I have 
 enumerated above. You would prepare several houses for defense 
 at commanding points, barricade the streets, clear the ground to 
 secure a clear field of fire, and locate your supports and reserve so 
 that they can reinforce the line as required. Unless the village is in 
 the general line, you will have to prepare it for all-around defense . 
 Orchards can be cut down and abatis constructed from the felled 
 trees. To construct an abatis, fell the trees, strip them of all leaves 
 and twigs, sharpen the branches, and place them towards the enem;y . 
 The trees should interlock and be staked down, so that the enemy 
 cannot pull them out of the way easily. An abatis is of little value 
 unless it is about 4 feet high and at least 5 feet thick. This form of 
 obstacle is very effective, but requires considerable time to construct 
 properly and it is of little value unless it is constructed properly. 
 
 In defending localities, employ the general principles governing 
 the location of trenches and defensive positions, houses and villages, 
 as far as they may be applicable. 
 
 If you gentlemen care to study this subject further, you may 
 find what you want in the Manual of Field Engineering, U. S. 
 Army, and the Engineer Field Manual, U. S. Army. 
 
 I neglected to mention that houses which have porches or over- 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 163 
 
 hanging galleries are specially valuable for defensive purposes, as 
 these porches can be sand-bagged and have loop-holes cut in the 
 floor of the porch or overhanging gallery, which will enable you to 
 cover the dead space between windows and doors with an effective 
 fire. Nearly all Spanish, Mexican, and Central American houses 
 have these overhanging galleries. 
 
 LECTURE No. 10. 
 TRAINING FOR BATTLE. 
 
 Paragraph 1, Part I. of the Infantry Drill Regulations says: 
 "Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military. training; 
 success may be looked for only when the training is intelligent and 
 thorough ." 
 
 You gentlemen of the National Guard have a very limited time 
 in which to give your men this training. It is therefore necessary 
 that you devote what little time you have to absolute essentials . 
 Now, what are the essentials? That is a question that has been 
 asked me by scores of National Guard officers and they have doubt- 
 less asked themselves the same question hundreds of times. The 
 object of this lecture is to try to assist you in answering that dif- 
 ficult question. I believe that the essentials are: 
 
 Precise close order drill; not too much, but what you have 
 must be snappy and very exact. You are wasting your time unless 
 it is snappy and exact. The object of close order drill is to impart 
 discipline to your command. It was discovered centuries ago that 
 this was the best method of disciplining an army. 
 
 The next essential is a thorough training in extended order 
 drill. This is not for disciplinary purposes, but it is to teach you 
 and your men how to maneuver on the battle-field. You must 
 know this thoroughly; you must know it so well that it will become 
 a firmly fixed habit. When a command is given, there must be no 
 hesitation, no delay; the movement must be executed instantly. 
 There mukt be no confusion; every man mu3t know where he be- 
 longs, where he is to go, aiid exactly how he is to get there. 
 
 The basis of this drill is the squad. This is the little group upon 
 which the whole structure is built. It follows, therefore, that your 
 
164 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 squad training must be thorough and your corporals must be ef- 
 ficient. If your squads are efficient, your company will be efficient ; 
 if they do not know their drill well, you cannot maneuver your 
 company. 
 
 The tendency in all National Guard organizations is to try to 
 go too fast. They slight squad drill because they do not appreciate 
 its importance. If men can get around fairly well in the squad, they 
 are satisfied. Now, gentlemen, this won't do. There must be no 
 ''fairly well" about it. It must be done exactly right. 
 
 Now, don't expect the same precision in extended order drill 
 that you have in close order drill; we don't need it; it is not nec- 
 essary; but what we do need, and what you must insist upon and 
 continually strive for, is that no man gets lost. He must know 
 where he belongs at all times and under all circumstances. When 
 you have attained that standard, you are efficient; until you do, you 
 are not. 
 
 Remember, there is no such thing as confusion in extended 
 order drill where every man knows exactly where he belongs, 
 without asking some other man or stopping to look around. A 
 man may be a little late in getting into his place, but if he knows 
 where he belongs and is getting there as fast as he can, that^is all 
 right. Controlled disorder ceases to be disorder. 
 
 Your company must be so well drilled that, no matter what 
 formation they are in or how they are facing when the command "As 
 skirmishers, gviide right, left or center" is given, every man must 
 know where he belongs and he must proceed to get there as soon 
 as he can. It does not matter whether you have the right or the 
 left or the flanks in the center, the command "Guide right, left or 
 center** tells you where the base squad is and you must deploy on it. 
 Your men will never know where they belong in the company until 
 they know where they belong in the scfuad. The corporal com- 
 mands, ''Follow me," and he will lead them where they should go ; 
 when they arrive there, they will deploy on him. 
 
 The third essential is target practice. Now, this doesn't mean 
 that every man must be an expert rifleman; it is sufficient if he 
 is a first-class shot. An expert rifleman who is not disciplined and 
 not well trained in extended order drill is of less value on the firing- 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 165 
 
 line than a third-class shot who has discipline and knows his drill, 
 and I will tell you why. Fire in battle must be directed and con- 
 trolled. If your expert rifleman is not disciplined, you will not be 
 able to get him to shoot where you want him to and you can't get 
 him to use the kind of fire you want. The mere fact that he is an 
 expert rifleman does not endow him with these qualities. The 
 fire of an entire company of 150 men, all expert riflemen, but all 
 firing at a target that each man has selected for himself, and each 
 man using the fire that he thinks appropriate to the occasion is 
 less effective than the concentrated, directed, and controlled fire of 
 one platoon of second-class shots. Now, this sounds pretty strong , 
 but let us see. We have the enemy i)i front of us, but we can only 
 see about fifteeh men of his line. All your imdisciplined experts 
 will shoot at these men; they will probably hit them all in a few 
 rounds, but the men, although shot, will continue to lie in the same 
 place, and your experts will continue to shoot more bullets into 
 these fifteen dead men. Now, what are they accomplishing? Ab- 
 solutely nothing. In the meantime that part of the enemy's line 
 that cannot be plainly seen, and consequently is not having a shot 
 fired at it, is lying along there doing target practice shooting. You 
 want to direct your fire where you think the enemy probably is, 
 but you cannot because your men will not do as they are told be- 
 cause they have no discipline. Now, if these men won't obey you 
 in the armory, they will not do it on the firing-line. 
 
 Now, let us see about extended order drill: After much effort, 
 you have gotten your undrilled, undisciplined men on the line, and 
 the enemy launches an attack against your flank. What are you 
 going to do? You can't maneuver, because your men are not well 
 drilled. I will tell you what you will do : You will all ''beat it." Now, 
 if you have third-class shots who are disciplined and know their 
 drill, you will be 100 per cent better off than you would be with this 
 bunch of experts who can't drill and will not do what they are told . 
 If you doubt this, assume yourself in action with a civilian rifle club . 
 Now, don't misunderstand me; I am not decrying the value of 
 musketry training, but you must have discipline and drill in order 
 to make the best use of it on the battle-field. These three essen- 
 tials go together; your company is not efficient until you are well 
 
166 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 trained in all three, but don't neglect any one for the others. You 
 must divide your time between all three, and not devote too much 
 attention to any one because it is your hobby. 
 
 Now, I have enumerated what I believe to be three essentials 
 in training for battle for the National Guard. In the regular Service 
 we have more than three, but I don't believe that you gentlemen 
 have the time to devote to anything more than the three enumer- 
 ated above. If you make good in these, you will learn the rest in 
 campaign in a short time by association with regular troops; but if 
 you are not proficient in these three, you will be slaughtered on the 
 battle-field before you have time to learn them. I will now take 
 them up in the order enumerated, and endeavor to give you an idea 
 of how much time you can devote to each. 
 
 First, your reccruit must have a thorough and systematic course 
 in close order before he is allowed to take his place in the company . 
 You gain nothing by placing him in the ranks of the company too 
 soon and it has the disadvantage of keeping your other men back, 
 because he ^' balls up" the formations, and you continually have to 
 correct him and come back to squad drill for his benefit. This 
 disgusts the other men and they lose interest in drill and will *'beat" 
 the next one if they can. 
 
 After your men are proficient in squad drill, it is sufficient if 
 you drill them for twenty minutes in close order drill in teaching 
 them company drill. A close order company drill of more than 
 twenty minutes is, I believe, too long. The men lose interest. 
 But make your drill sharp and snappy, although short. After your 
 men are proficient in company close order drill, ten minutes of sharp 
 close order will be sufficient each drill-night. This should be given 
 first. In the regular Service we give this drill first and last, but you 
 gentlemen cannot spare that last ten minutes; you have too many 
 other things to learn. 
 
 Now, don't waste time on Butts' Manual. This drill is excel- 
 lent if you have the time to spare, as we have in the regular Service, 
 but you can't hope to have it more than once a week, and given that 
 way it has little valua;. besides, you can't spare the time.^ 
 
 Bayonet exercise, an essential which belongs to close order 
 drill, although not given for disciplinary purposes, but to teach a 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 167 
 
 man to fight with his bayonet, will harden their muscles sufficiently 
 if they need such training. 
 
 Now we come to extended order drill. Devote every moment 
 that you can spare from close order drill and target practice to it , 
 and that will be little enough; but don't slight the others. 
 
 As to target practice, if you can have men shoot the gallery 
 course and the range course once a year, you have done all that can 
 reasonably be expected of you. Just before I was ordered down 
 here, I was on duty with the National Gu^rd of Utah, and they 
 had a scheme for target practice that appealed to me as excellent. 
 They have the same trouble in getting their men for target practice 
 that you have, and they have solved the problem in this way : in their 
 yearly camp they devote every afternoon to range practice. They 
 manage somehow to have their men shoot the gallery course in the 
 armories. They drilled all morning in camp in extended order 
 drills and battle exercises and shot all afternoon. It was pretty 
 strenuous, but I did not hear a kick from anyone. The reiult was 
 satisfactory, and was much better than having the men lie around 
 in their tents. 
 
 Now I am going to take up fire control, fire direction, and 
 fire distribution. Fire control requires discipline; without control, 
 you can't direct it; if you can't direct it, you can't distribute it; if 
 you can't distribute it, your fire will not be effective and you will 
 never attain fire superiority; if you can't secure fire superiority, 
 you will never be able to advance in the attack or stop the enemy' s 
 attack in the defense. 
 
 Now, what is fire control? Fire control implies a perfect com- 
 mand over your firiiig-l^n^. You must be able to commence firing, 
 cease firing, use clip or volley fire, without the slightest delay or 
 confusion. You mtist be able to increase or diminish the rate of 
 fire at will. When you are able to do all these things, you l^ave fire 
 control. * , 
 
 Now, what is fire direction? Fire direction implies the ability 
 to direct the fire of your unit upon any target or locality that you 
 wish. Your men must be so well trained that they will shoot at 
 the object indicated, whether they can see any signs of the enemy 
 or not. You must be able to shift your fire from one locality to 
 
168 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 another without delay or confusion. Before you can accompUsh 
 this object, you must be able to clearly describe the target or exact 
 location of the locality at which you wish to shoot to the men of 
 your command without it being necessary to point out the location 
 to each man individually. This direction must be so clear that it 
 will be readily understood by each man in your command. This 
 necessitates the cultivation of your descriptive powers. 
 
 Now, what is fire distribution? Fire distribution implies that 
 the entire target is covered with a well-delivered and directed fire . 
 This distribution must be so complete that no part of the target is 
 slighted in the least degree. It implies that the least visible portions 
 of the target are covered with an as effective fire as those parts 
 which are plainly visible. Remember that a section of the enemy's 
 line not covered with an effective fire represents a part of the enemy's 
 line which you are allowing to fire with peace-time accuracy. No 
 line can withstand a fire of this kind. Now, why is this so? I will 
 tell you. It has been found by careful computation and experiment 
 that when a line are firing with peace-time accuracy, they make a 
 certain per cent of hits; it has also been proven that when you open 
 an effective fire uipon this line, their fire drops off in accuracy from 
 one-fortieth to one-seventieth (authorities differ a little bit on the 
 proportion). Now, to illustrate this, let us assume that the firing- 
 line not under fire is firing with an accuracy which gives them 280 
 hits per minute. (This is merely to illustrate the proportion, re- 
 member.) N6w, when you subject this line to an effective fire, their 
 hits drop off from 280 to 7 or 4. Let us take the highest number, 7 . 
 Now, you see what this means — you have gained fire superiority, 
 and you can advance. But suppose your fire is not distributed 
 evenly along the enemy's entire line — say, for the sake of argument, 
 that half of their line is not covered with fire at all; this part of the 
 line is shooting with an accuracy which gives them 280 hits. It is 
 true that the part of the line at which you are firing is only making 
 about 2 hits per minute, being under the concentrated fire of your 
 entire line; but as half of the line is not under any fire at all, the 
 average for the entire line is 280 plus 2, which equals 282, and this 
 divided by 2 gives you an average for the entire line of 141. Nowj 
 no troops on God's green earth can advance against any fire like 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 169 
 
 that. Now you can see why fire distribution is absolutely essential. 
 You have got to bring the average for the entire line down to 7 be- 
 fore you have a ghost of a show. 
 
 Now, how do we get fire distribution? We get it by dividing 
 the entire enemy's line into sections and by assigning a section to 
 each subdivision in your firing-line. How is this done? The colo- 
 nel divides the target between his battalions, the majors divide 
 their sector between their companies, the captains divide their parts 
 between their platoons, and the platoon commanders divide the 
 part assigned to them between their squads. It is very simple, 
 but it requires lots of practice before you can do it well and before 
 you can describe your section to your men so clearly that there 
 will be no chance of mistakes. Now, it is not necessary to have a 
 company out at drill in order to practice this. Ypu gentlemen 
 can do it whenever you get out in open country, or even when you 
 are passing a vacant lot. Say to yourself: ''The enemy is over 
 there, and I want to divide his line so that it will be covered by 
 the fire of my four platoons; what sector will I assign to the first 
 platoon? what to the second?" and so on. Practice this whenever 
 you get the chance. 
 
 Now, all this brings up another question: Before you can 
 control these men on the firing-line, you must have a system that 
 will work — ^not one that will work here on the armory floor, but one 
 that will work under all conditions on the firing-line. This system 
 must be one of signals. 
 
 Usually you go out to drill and you will see a major running up 
 and down the firing-line giving orders to captains verbally; you 
 will see captains going up and giving orders to their platoon com- 
 manders and occasionally correcting a private personally; platoon 
 commanders doing the same thing. Now, that won't work under 
 battle conditions. A verbal command cannot be heard five yards 
 when the whole line is shooting. A man — any man — who exposes 
 himself by standing up or kneeling in rear of the firing-line will last 
 about five seconds before he is killed or wounded. It is absolutely 
 impossible to move back and forth in rear of the firing-line in action . 
 Now, don't forget that. That being the case, how are we going to 
 control the firing-line? We have got to control it by signals, and 
 
170 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 by signals alone. You will fin^ these signals in the Infantry Drill 
 Regulations, Paragraphs 41 to 47, inclusive. You have got to mem- 
 orize them thoroughly. You can't do anything without them. 
 
 Now let us see how this works out in action. When the battal - 
 ion is ordered forward into action, the major will call up his company 
 commanders and repeat his instructions to them, so that all will know 
 the plan if he is killed and so that all can endeavor to carry out the 
 plan intelUgently; he assigns certain companies to the firing-line 
 and certain ones to the support, and tells each captain what he is to 
 do and what is expected of him; he divides the target between the 
 companies to compose the firing-line and orders them to move out. 
 Captains return to their companies, explain the situation to their 
 lieutenants, and tell the men enough so that they can help to carry 
 out the plan; divide the target between their platoons, give them 
 the range at which fire is to be opened, and start the attack forward. 
 Platoon commanders divide the target between their squads, open 
 fire at the proper time, and control the fire. Remember, captains 
 direct the fire, but platoon commanders control it — that is their job. 
 Sergeants and corporals assist the platoon commanders in this 
 control. The corporal must see that his men set their sights prop- 
 erly, fire at th'e object ordered, and employ the kind of fire indi- 
 cated — that is his work, and in order to accomplish this successfully 
 he must be on the job every second. Now you begin to see how 
 important it is that you have efficient squad leaders. Let us see 
 just how this system works out on the firing-line: 
 
 Platoon commanders are in rear of their platoons, captains are 
 in rear of their companies, the major is in rear of the firing-line about 
 150 yards or so and between it and the supports. He has his 
 sergeant-major and a musician with him; he may have an orderly 
 or two also. Remember, the platoon commander has his platoon 
 guide at his side, the captain has his two musicians, and the first 
 sergeant, if he is not in command of a platoon. Now, the major 
 wants the fine to advance; he blows a blast on his whistle to attract 
 the attention of the company musicians, who look back to see what 
 he wants — ^he wants the line to advance, so he signals '*F." The 
 company musician repeats back the signal (remember, all signals 
 are always repeated back when understood), then turns to the cap- 
 
COMPANY. TRAINING (INFANTRY). 171 
 
 tain and says: "The majpr signals *F\" The captain blows a 
 blast on his whistle to attract the attention of the platoon guides 
 or the"^ platoon guide of the platoon to which he wishes to give 
 orders, points at him, and gives the signal for platoon rush. The 
 platoon guide repeats back the signal, and then tuims to his platoon 
 commander and says: ''The captain signals platoon rush." The 
 platoon commander blows a blast on his whistle to attract the at- 
 tention of his squad leader, who, upon hearing it, ceases firing (no t 
 his squad, but he alone), looks back, gets the signal for suspend 
 firing and rush, repeats it back, causes his squad to suspend firing 
 and be ready to go forward at the platoon commander's command . 
 When all is ready, the platoon commander commands, 'ToUow me," 
 and, running at top speed, leads the platoon to its place in the new 
 line. To halt the platoon, he gives the signal for halting and then 
 gives the signal for firing. 
 
 You see how simple it all is. But Napoleon said: ''All things 
 in war are simple, but the simplest things are difficult." You will 
 find this to be very, very true. 
 
 Now you see why so much extended order drill is so necessary. 
 You have got to know these things so well that they will become 
 a habit. 
 
 Reinforcing the Firing-line. 
 
 Now I am going to take up another very important matter — 
 that of reinforcing the firing-line. 
 
 Paragraph 226, Infantry Drill Regulations, says: "A rein- 
 forcement of less than a platoon has Uttle influence and will be 
 avoided whenever practicable." 
 
 The firing-line needs a good reinforcement or it needs no rein- 
 forcement. Sending a squad or two into the firing-line has^ Ht- 
 tle appreciable effect. Now, why is this so? Let us re^dew the 
 causes which render the reinforcing of the firing-line necessary. We 
 reinforce the firing-fine when we wish to increase the density of our 
 fire; we reinforce it when the line has suffered losses which have 
 reduced its fire n>aterially; we reinforce it when the line has been 
 subjected to a severe fire and when its morale has been impaired in 
 consequence. It is not necessary that the fine should have suffered 
 severe losses; the fact that they have been exposed to a heavy fire 
 
172 COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 
 
 frequently is enough to demorali^je them, especially if they are 
 ''green" troops. A reinforcement joining the line at this time often 
 will have a most beneficial effect. It encourages the men, and often 
 will cause those on the line to recover their nerve and settle down 
 and do good work. We reinforce the firing-line when we want 
 them to go forward and when it is difficult to get the men to leave 
 the ground and rush. A reinforcement coming up from the rear 
 will often carry the line forward with it to the new position. We 
 reinforce the line when it is necessary to replace losses. 
 
 In any of the above cases you will see how little effect a rein - 
 forcement of a squad will have. 
 
 Now the next question is, " How should these men join the fine? " 
 They must go in wherever there is a gap or an interval in the line; 
 one man here, four men there, six men some other place — ^wherever 
 there is an interval. The firing-line cannot leave exact gaps, in 
 .which you can place an entire squad or platoon. If they can ma- 
 neuver like that, they are all right and don't need reinforcing. Of 
 course, when you come up on a flank, you can preserve the integrity 
 of your units; but that will be the exception. The rule is. You will 
 go in wherever there is an opening. 
 
 Paragraph 375, Infantry Drill Regulations, says: ''When the 
 men of two or more units intermingle in the firing-line, all officers 
 and men submit at once to the senior.'' 
 
 Now this method naturally suggests the question, "Won't there 
 be confusion unutterable if this is done?" It should not, and I will 
 tell you why. The original platoon and squad divisions were in the 
 1 ine before it was reinforced, were they not? Well, they are there yet. 
 There has been nothing to change them. When the reinforcement 
 joins the line, it goes in wherever there is a hole, and consequently 
 you reinforce the squads and platoons that need it the most. Now, 
 the men joining the firing-line don't know where these divisions are, 
 but the men on the firing-line do. Jones knows that he is the left 
 of the first platoon, and Smith knows that he is the right of the second, 
 etc. Now, when the first platoon is ordered forward, Jones goes with 
 it; Smith does not, because he belongs to the second. Now suppose 
 you have placed three men in between Jones and Smith — what will 
 they do? We have answered that question in the 21st Infantry 
 
COMPANY TRAINING (INFANTRY). 173 
 
 by making the rule that men joining the firing-line always go for- 
 ward, when a rush is ordered, with the men on their right. Now, 
 this rule will take the three men between Jones and Smith, and after 
 that the third man on the left of Jones knows that he belongs to 
 the first platoon. The same thing works in the squad. You see 
 how simple it is; but your men must know this so thoroughly that 
 it will be a habit. 
 
 If an officer or non-commissioned officer coming up with rein- 
 forcements sees that he is senior to the man commanding a platoon, 
 he takes charge at once and the other man will act as his assistant. 
 
 Now, do you begin to see why we officers of the regular Service 
 insist upon so much drill and discipline? It is not for show; it is 
 not because we officers think that we are so much better than the 
 other fellow; it is not for the glory of having men salute you and to 
 have the fun of ordering them around; it is simply that we have 
 learned by years of experience that you can't do anything without it. 
 
 If you are going to play this game, you have got to play it right; 
 there is no middle course. 
 
 I intended to make this lecture very much longer than it is, 
 but, reading it over, I came to the conclusion that I had better quit 
 right here. There is lots more that I could tell you, but if you get 
 the things down pat that I have explained to you in this lecture, I 
 will be more than satisfied, and then I will have another one for you. 
 
 There is no such thing as learning this game. The further on 
 you go the more you will see that there are lots of things yet to be 
 learned. 
 
 I have frequently heard officers and men say that drills are 
 monotonous. They can be made so if you have never learned squad 
 drill correctly and consequently cannot get away from it; but if you 
 have a good foundation, there is no limit to the things before you. 
 
 You can study this game for years and never have to rerpad 
 a book. 
 
 I will be glad to answer any questions/ 
 
-.-^ 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFOENIA LIBRAEY 
 BERKELEY 
 
 THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 Books not returned on time are subject to a fine of 
 50c per volume after the third day overdue, increasing 
 to $1.00 per volume after the sixth day. Books not in 
 demand may be renewed if application is made before 
 expiration of loan period. 
 
 WAR 19 1918 
 
 50w-7,'16 
 

 ^B 03969